Av PDF

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION AV B
E
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO Reference Values ....................................................25 F
Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO — ........................27
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 10
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 32 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........10
Work Flow ............................................................... 10 AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .......................... 32
Symptom Table .......................................................32
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 12 H
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 33
AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................12 Description ...............................................................33
System Diagram ...................................................... 12
PRECAUTION .............................................. 34 I
System Description ................................................. 12
Component Parts Location ...................................... 13
Component Description ........................................... 13
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 34
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System J
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................14 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 14 SIONER" .................................................................34
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ............................34
K
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 18 Precaution for Harness Repair ................................34
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......18 PREPARATION ........................................... 36

L
AUDIO UNIT .............................................................. 18 PREPARATION ................................................. 36
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 18 Commercial Service Tools .......................................36
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT .........19 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 37 M
Description .............................................................. 19
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 19 AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 37
Component Inspection ............................................ 20 Exploded View .........................................................37 AV
Removal and Installation .........................................37
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT .........21
Description .............................................................. 21 AUDIO DISPLAY ............................................... 38
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 21 Exploded View .........................................................38 O
Component Inspection ............................................ 22 Removal and Installation .........................................38
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT....23 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 39 P

Description .............................................................. 23 Exploded View .........................................................39
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 23 Removal and Installation .........................................39
Component Inspection ............................................ 24
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 40
ECU DIAGNOSIS ......................................... 25 Exploded View .........................................................40
Removal and Installation .........................................40
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................25
Revision: 2008 October AV-1 2009 Murano

FRONT SQUAWKER ......................................... 41 System Diagram ..................................................... 60
Exploded View ........................................................ 41 System Description ................................................. 60
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 Component Parts Location ..................................... 62
Component Description .......................................... 63
STEERING SWITCH .......................................... 42
Exploded View ........................................................ 42 DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM .................... 64
Removal and Installation ........................................ 42 System Diagram ..................................................... 64
ROOF ANTENNA .............................................. 43 Component Parts Location ..................................... 65
Exploded View ........................................................ 43 Component Description .......................................... 66
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ...................... 67
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ........................... 44 System Diagram ..................................................... 67
Harness Layout ...................................................... 44 System Description ................................................. 67
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION Component Parts Location ..................................... 68
Component Description .......................................... 69
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 45
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) ... 70
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 45 Diagnosis Description ............................................. 70
Work Flow ............................................................... 45 CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ........................ 83
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 47 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)... 87
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 87
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................. 47 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 89
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ... 47 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 89
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING Description .............................................................. 89
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re- DTC Logic ............................................................... 89
pair Requirement .................................................... 47 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 89
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 90
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 47 Description .............................................................. 90
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic ............................................................... 90
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 90
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ..... 47 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 91
Description .............................................................. 91
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE DTC Logic ............................................................... 91
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ........................ 47
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 92
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description Description .............................................................. 92
... 47 DTC Logic ............................................................... 92
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Re- U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 93
pair Requirement .................................................... 47 Description .............................................................. 93
DTC Logic ............................................................... 93
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................. 48
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ....................................... 94
MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................... 48 Description .............................................................. 94
System Diagram ..................................................... 48 DTC Logic ............................................................... 94
System Description ................................................. 51 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94
Component Parts Location ..................................... 53
Component Description .......................................... 54 U1247 REAR DISP CONN ................................ 96
Description .............................................................. 96
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ..................... 57 DTC Logic ............................................................... 96
System Diagram ..................................................... 57 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 96
Component Parts Location ..................................... 58 U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................... 98
Component Description .......................................... 59 Description .............................................................. 98
DTC Logic ............................................................... 98
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 60 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 98

U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ...................99 RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
Description .............................................................. 99 TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ....... 115 A
DTC Logic ............................................................... 99 Description ............................................................. 115
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 99 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115
B
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 101 HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY
Description ............................................................ 101 UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ....................... 116
Description ............................................................. 116
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 103 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116 C
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 103
VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 103
UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ....................... 117 D
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ........................................... 103 Description ............................................................. 117
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .... 103 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117
REAR DISPLAY UNIT ............................................. 104 COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV E
REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ...... 104 CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT). 118
Description ............................................................. 118
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ............................................ 105 F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 105
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VID-
DVD PLAYER .......................................................... 106
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 106
EO DISTRIBUTOR TO AV CONTROL UNIT) . 119
G
Description ............................................................. 119
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ..................................... 106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 106 COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VID- H
EO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT)
BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 107 . 120
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 107 Description ............................................................. 120 I
WOOFER ................................................................. 108
WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 108 RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DIS-
TRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) .......... 121 J
IPOD ADAPTER ...................................................... 108
iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 108 Description ............................................................. 121
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 109 K
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce- RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO
dure ....................................................................... 109 DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) .... 122
Description ............................................................. 122 L
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ............................................... 109 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........ 109
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) .... 123 M
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 111 Description ............................................................. 123
Description ............................................................ 111 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 111 AV
COMPOSITE SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR
CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT).. 112 DISPLAY UNIT) ............................................... 124
Description ............................................................ 112 O
Description ............................................................. 124
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO P
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 113 DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) .... 125
Description ............................................................ 113 Description ............................................................. 125
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 113 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 125
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..... 114 VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT
Description ............................................................ 114 TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR) ............................. 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114 Description ............................................................. 126

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................126 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 143
Description ............................................................ 143
HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR) ............................. 127 Component Inspection .......................................... 144
Description .............................................................127
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................127 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT.. 145
Description ............................................................ 145
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 128 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145
Component Inspection .......................................... 146
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM .........128
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 147
Description .............................................................128
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 147
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................128 Reference Values ................................................. 147
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ................129
GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : De-
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 154
scription .................................................................129
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : Diag-
GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
nosis Procedure .....................................................129
TEM - .................................................................... 171
DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 131 DTC Index ............................................................. 192
Description .............................................................131
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 194
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................131
Reference Values ................................................. 194
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 132 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
Description .............................................................132 GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................132 SYSTEM - ............................................................. 196
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 133 GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
Description .............................................................133 TEM - .................................................................... 213
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 235
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......................... 135 Reference Values ................................................. 235
Description .............................................................135 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................135 GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 237
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CONTROL GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
UNIT) ................................................................ 136 TEM - .................................................................... 254
Description .............................................................136
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................136 REAR DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 276
CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 137 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
Description .............................................................137 GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................137 TEM - .................................................................... 278
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAM- VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ..................................... 300
ERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL Reference Values ................................................. 300
UNIT) ................................................................ 138 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
Description .............................................................138 GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................138 TEM - .................................................................... 303
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR- DVD PLAYER ................................................... 325

CUIT ................................................................. 139 Reference Values ................................................. 325
Description .............................................................139 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................139 GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
TEM - .................................................................... 326
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ...... 141
Description .............................................................141 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 348
Component Inspection ...........................................142

Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................. 523
GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT Exploded View ....................................................... 523 A
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 349 Removal and Installation ....................................... 523
GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS- REAR DISPLAY UNIT ..................................... 524
B
TEM - .................................................................... 366 Exploded View ....................................................... 524
Removal and Installation ....................................... 524
iPod ADAPTER ................................................ 388
Reference Values .................................................. 388 VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR .................................... 525 C
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- Exploded View ....................................................... 525
GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT Removal and Installation ....................................... 525
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 389 D
DVD PLAYER .................................................. 526
GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS- Exploded View ....................................................... 526
TEM - .................................................................... 406 Removal and Installation ....................................... 526
E
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 428 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 527
Exploded View ....................................................... 527
Reference Values .................................................. 428
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- F
GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 528
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 429 Exploded View ....................................................... 528
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- Removal and Installation ....................................... 528 G
GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
TEM - .................................................................... 446 FRONT SQUAWKER ...................................... 529
Exploded View ....................................................... 529
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .............................. 468 Removal and Installation ....................................... 529 H
Reference Values .................................................. 468
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- REAR SPEAKER ............................................ 530
GATION WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT Exploded View ....................................................... 530 I
SYSTEM - ............................................................. 470 Removal and Installation ....................................... 530
GATION WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS- CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 531
Exploded View ....................................................... 531 J
TEM - .................................................................... 487
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 509
WOOFER ......................................................... 532 K
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 509 Exploded View ....................................................... 532
Symptom Table ..................................................... 509 Removal and Installation ....................................... 532
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 517 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 533 L

Description ............................................................ 517 Exploded View ....................................................... 533
PRECAUTION ............................................ 519 M
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 534
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 519 Exploded View ....................................................... 534
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Removal and Installation ....................................... 534
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- AV
SIONER" ............................................................... 519 PRESET SWITCH ........................................... 535
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 519 Exploded View ....................................................... 535
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 519 Removal and Installation ....................................... 535 O
PREPARATION ......................................... 521 STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 536
Exploded View ....................................................... 536
PREPARATION ................................................ 521 Removal and Installation ....................................... 536 P
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 521
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 537
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 522 Exploded View ....................................................... 537
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 522
Exploded View ...................................................... 522 iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 538
Removal and Installation ....................................... 522 Exploded View ....................................................... 538

Removal and Installation .......................................538 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 553
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 539 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Exploded View .......................................................539 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 553
Removal and Installation .......................................539
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
MICROPHONE ................................................. 540 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ...................... 553
Exploded View .......................................................540 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
Removal and Installation .......................................540 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
. 553
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 541 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
Exploded View .......................................................541 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Re-
Removal and Installation .......................................541 pair Requirement .................................................. 553
Adjustment .............................................................541
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ........................... 554
REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 542
Exploded View .......................................................542 MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 554
Removal and Installation .......................................542 System Diagram ................................................... 554
Adjustment .............................................................542 System Description ............................................... 555
Component Parts Location ................................... 557
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 544
Component Description ........................................ 558
Exploded View .......................................................544
Removal and Installation .......................................544 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 560
System Diagram ................................................... 560
ROOF ANTENNA ............................................ 545
System Description ............................................... 560
Exploded View .......................................................545
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 546
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 565
Exploded View .......................................................546
System Diagram ................................................... 565
System Description ............................................... 565
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 547 Component Parts Location ................................... 566
Exploded View .......................................................547 Component Description ........................................ 567
AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 568
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 548 System Diagram ................................................... 568
Harness Layout .....................................................548 System Description ............................................... 568
ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO) ..... 549 Component Description ........................................ 571
Harness Layout .....................................................549
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ..................... 572
ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL) .............................. 550 System Diagram ................................................... 572
Harness Layout .....................................................550 System Description ............................................... 572
BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION Component Parts Location ................................... 573
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 551
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) .. 575
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 551 Diagnosis Description ........................................... 575
Work Flow ..............................................................551 CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 589
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 553 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ...................... 593

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT- U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 593
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................553 Description ............................................................ 593
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DTC Logic ............................................................. 593
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ..553 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 593
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re- U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 594
pair Requirement ...................................................553 Description ............................................................ 594
DTC Logic ............................................................. 594
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 594
CONTROL UNIT .......................................................553

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 595 U1205 GPS ...................................................... 610
Description ............................................................ 595 Description ............................................................. 610 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 595 DTC Logic .............................................................. 610
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 596
B
Description ............................................................ 596 U1206 GPS ...................................................... 611
DTC Logic ............................................................. 596 Description ............................................................. 611
DTC Logic .............................................................. 611
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 597 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 611 C
Description ............................................................ 597
DTC Logic ............................................................. 597 U1207 GPS ...................................................... 612
Description ............................................................. 612 D
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 598 DTC Logic .............................................................. 612
Description ............................................................ 598 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 612
DTC Logic ............................................................. 598
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 613 E
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 599 Description ............................................................. 613
Description ............................................................ 599 DTC Logic .............................................................. 613
DTC Logic ............................................................. 599 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 613 F
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 600 U1244 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 615
Description ............................................................ 600 Description ............................................................. 615
DTC Logic ............................................................. 600 DTC Logic .............................................................. 615 G
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 601
Description ............................................................ 601 U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ................. 616
DTC Logic ............................................................. 601 H
Description ............................................................. 616
DTC Logic .............................................................. 616
U1220 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 602
Description ............................................................ 602 I
DTC Logic ............................................................. 602 U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA .......... 617
Description ............................................................. 617
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 603
DTC Logic .............................................................. 617 J
Description ............................................................ 603
DTC Logic ............................................................. 603
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 618
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 604 K
Description ............................................................. 618
Description ............................................................ 604
DTC Logic ............................................................. 604 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 619
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 605 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 619 L
Description ............................................................ 605 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 619
DTC Logic ............................................................. 605
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ........................................... 619 M
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 606 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .... 619
Description ............................................................ 606
DTC Logic ............................................................. 606 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ..................................... 620
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce- AV
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 607 dure ....................................................................... 620
Description ............................................................ 607
DTC Logic ............................................................. 607 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ...................................... 621
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure O
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 608 .. 621
Description ............................................................ 608
BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 621 P
DTC Logic ............................................................. 608
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 621
WOOFER ................................................................. 622
U1204 GPS ....................................................... 609
WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 622
Description ............................................................ 609
DTC Logic ............................................................. 609 IPOD ADAPTER ...................................................... 622
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 609 iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 623

RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 624 CUIT .................................................................. 638
Description .............................................................624 Description ............................................................ 638
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................624 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 638
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 640
CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT). 625 Description ............................................................ 640
Description .............................................................625 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 640
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................625 Component Inspection .......................................... 641
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 642
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 626 Description ............................................................ 642
Description .............................................................626 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 642
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................626 Component Inspection .......................................... 643
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 627 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT.. 644
Description .............................................................627 Description ............................................................ 644
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................627 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 644
Component Inspection .......................................... 645
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 628 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 646
Description .............................................................628
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 646
HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ........................ 629 TION SYSTEM - ................................................... 652
Description .............................................................629 Fail-Safe ................................................................ 668
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................629 DTC Index ............................................................. 670
VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 672

UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ........................ 630 Reference Values ................................................. 672
Description .............................................................630 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................630 TION SYSTEM - ................................................... 674
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 631 BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 692
Description .............................................................631 Reference Values ................................................. 692
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................631 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
TION SYSTEM - ................................................... 694
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 632
Description .............................................................632 iPod ADAPTER ................................................ 712
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 633 TION SYSTEM - ................................................... 714
Description .............................................................633
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................633 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .............................. 731
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CONTROL TION SYSTEM - ................................................... 733
UNIT) ................................................................ 635
Description .............................................................635
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 751
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................635 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 751
CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 636 Symptom Table ..................................................... 751
Description .............................................................636 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 756
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................636 Description ............................................................ 756
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAM- PRECAUTION ........................................... 761
ERA CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT) ................................................................ 637 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 761
Description .............................................................637

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View ....................................................... 774
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation ....................................... 774 A
SIONER" ............................................................... 761
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 761 STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 775
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 761 Exploded View ....................................................... 775
Removal and Installation ....................................... 775 B
PREPARATION ......................................... 763
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 776
PREPARATION ................................................ 763 Exploded View ....................................................... 776 C
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 763 Removal and Installation ....................................... 776
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 764 iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 777

Exploded View ....................................................... 777 D
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 764 Removal and Installation ....................................... 777
Exploded View ...................................................... 764
Removal and Installation ....................................... 764 AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................ 778 E
Exploded View ....................................................... 778
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 765 Removal and Installation ....................................... 778
Exploded View ...................................................... 765
Removal and Installation ....................................... 765 MICROPHONE ................................................ 779 F
Exploded View ....................................................... 779
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 766 Removal and Installation ....................................... 779
Exploded View ...................................................... 766 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 766 GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 780
Exploded View ....................................................... 780
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 767 Harness Layout ..................................................... 780
Exploded View ...................................................... 767 Removal and Installation ....................................... 781 H
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 782
FRONT SQUAWKER ....................................... 768 Exploded View ....................................................... 782 I
Exploded View ...................................................... 768 Removal and Installation ....................................... 782
Removal and Installation ....................................... 768 Adjustment ............................................................. 782
REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 769 REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 783 J
Exploded View ...................................................... 769 Exploded View ....................................................... 783
Removal and Installation ....................................... 769 Removal and Installation ....................................... 783
Adjustment ............................................................. 783 K
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 770
Exploded View ...................................................... 770 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 785
Removal and Installation ....................................... 770 Exploded View ....................................................... 785
Removal and Installation ....................................... 785 L
WOOFER .......................................................... 771
Exploded View ...................................................... 771 ROOF ANTENNA ............................................ 786
Removal and Installation ....................................... 771 Exploded View ....................................................... 786 M
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 772
Exploded View ...................................................... 772 ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 787
Removal and Installation ....................................... 772 Harness Layout ..................................................... 787 AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 773 ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO) .... 788
Exploded View ...................................................... 773 Harness Layout ..................................................... 788 O
ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS) ............................. 789
PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 774 Harness Layout ..................................................... 789
P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000003465354
OVERALL SEQUENCE
ALNIA0182GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify the relation between the symptom and the con-
dition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4 A
NO >> GO TO 2
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
B
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
C
>> GO TO 5
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and check that the symptom is not detected. D
Has the symptom been repaired?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO >> GO TO 2 E
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000003415156
JSNIA1060GB
NOTE:
An antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. is adopted.
System Description INFOID:0000000003465355
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components.
• Audio unit
• Rod antenna (AM/FM main)
• Glass antenna (FM sub)
• Steering switch
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Front squawker
• Audio display unit
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is integrated into audio unit.
• When AM/FM radio waves are received by rod antenna, the radio waves are amplified by an antenna amp.
to input them to audio unit. Sound signals are output to each speaker for the audio unit. The FM sub antenna
is installed on the back door window glass and the audio unit is received.
CD Mode
• The audio unit has CD function.
• The audio unit outputs sound signals to each speaker when CD is inserted into the audio unit.

AUDIO SYSTEM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003415158
JSNIA1098ZZ
G
1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH
4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 6. Rear door speaker RH
7. Front door speaker RH 8. Steering switch 9. Audio unit
H
10. Audio display unit
Component Description INFOID:0000000003415159
Part name Description

• Has radio function and CD playing function. J
AUDIO UNIT
• Sound signals are output to each speaker.
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT Display images are controlled by AV communication from audio unit.
• Outputs sound signals from audio unit. K
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range).
• Outputs sound signals from audio unit.
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range). L
• Outputs sound signals from audio unit.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range).
STEERING SWITCH Steering switch signals (operation signals) are output to audio unit. M
An antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA BASE • Radio waves received by rod antenna are amplified and transmitted to audio AV
unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from audio unit.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000003465356
Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items.

• Versions display
• Channel check diagnosis
• Key check diagnosis
• AV communication diagnosis
VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the audio unit off.
3. While pressing “1” button, turn volume control dial clockwise or
counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
JSNIA1143GB
4. Diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

NOTE:
Diagnosis default screen = All icons and segments of the audio display unit are turned on.
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the version display mode. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly
switches to each version display. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch when displaying each software
version returns to the diagnosis default screen.
Version display item
Mode Description
Software V###### Audio unit software version is displayed.
Hardware V###### Audio unit hardware version is displayed.
CD Mech V###### Audio unit CD mechanism version is displayed.
EEPROM V###### Audio unit EEPROM version is displayed.
Versions display
Disp SW V###### Display unit software version is displayed.
Disp HW V###### Display unit hardware version is displayed.
Audio unit SDARS version is displayed.
SDARS V###### NOTE:
“VFFFFFF” is displayed when SRARS is not available.
6. Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
CHANNEL CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

3. While pressing the “1” button, turn the volume control dial clock-
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. A
JSNIA1143GB
D
4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.
NOTE:
E
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial clockwise displays the channel check mode. Pressing and holding the
AUDIO switch during each channel check or waiting approximately 1 second after finishing all channel
checks returns to the diagnosis default screen.
F
Channel check item
Mode Description
Channel Check
G
Front Left
Channel Check
Front Right
Channel check Connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone. H
Channel Check
Rear Right
Channel Check
Rear Left
I

KEY CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION J
K
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
AV
JSNIA1143GB
4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

NOTE: O
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial counterclockwise displays the key check mode, and the pressed switch
name is shown. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch during the key check returns to the diagnosis P
default screen.

Key check item (audio unit)
Mode Display item Switch name
1 Preset button “1” switch
POWER “ON·OFF” switch
VOLUME up “VOL up” switch
VOLUME down “VOL down” switch
AM·FM “AM·FM” switch
DISC “DISC” switch
Key check
AUX “AUX” switch
AUDIO “AUDIO” switch
TUNE/FOLDER up “TUNE/FOLDER up” switch
TUNE/FOLDER down “TUNE/FOLDER up” switch
DISP CLOCK “DISP CLOCK” switch
SCAN “SCAN” switch
RPT/RDM “RPT RDM” switch
SEEK/TRACK up “SEEK CAT” switch
SEEK/TRACK down “TRACK” switch
LOAD “LOAD” switch
EJECT “EJECT” switch
Key check item (steering switch)

Mode Display item Switch name
STR SOURCE “SOURCE” switch
STR VOL UP “VOL up” switch
Key check STR VOL DOWN “VOL down” switch
STR UP “MENU up” switch
STR DOWN “MENU down” switch
AV COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
JSNIA1144GB
4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.

5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the AV communication diagnosis mode. Pressing the AUDIO
switch briefly again switches to each AV communication display. A
AV communication diagnosis item
Display item
Description
AV communication item Current Past B
The communication condition and error counter from the audio unit to
TRANSMIT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the audio display unit are displayed.
DISP OK / UN OK / 0 –39
C
The communication condition and error counter from the audio display
DISP MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39 unit to the audio unit.
NO HISTORY BTHF — — Not used. D

AV TROUBLE DEL — — The error record can be deleted.
6. Pressing the SEEK TRACK up switch displays the confirmation screen of “delete error record”. Press the
SEEK TRACK down switch if returning from RECORD DEL YES? to RECORD DEL NO? E
The item is automatically determined approximately 6 seconds after it is displayed. Then the display
returns to AV TROUBLE DEL display item.
F
Display item Description
RECORD DEL NO? Does not delete error record.
RECORD DEL YES? Deletes error record. G
H
AV

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003468501
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
Power source Fuse No.

Battery 35
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between audio unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply 19 OFF
M46 Battery voltage
ACC power supply 7 ACC
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between audio unit and fuse.

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000003468488
Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit. B

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003468489
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C

1. Disconnect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
Audio unit Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E
M46 6 M33 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and ground.
F
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
G
M46 6 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable. I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
3.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector terminals.
L
(+) (−)
Audio unit Voltage
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
M46 6 M46 15 Approx 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace audio unit.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-20, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? P
NO >> Replace steering switch.

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003468490
Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector ter-

minals.
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Con- Termi- Con- Termi- Condition
Ω
nector nals nector nal
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
SEEK UP switch ON 119 – 123
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0
VOL UP switch ON 119 – 123
15
VOL DOWN switch ON 0

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C

2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
Continuity
E
F
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
G
M46 16 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector terminals.
L
(+) (−)
Audio unit Voltage
M46 16 M46 15 Approx 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.


minals.
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0
15

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector. D

Continuity E
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE G
Check spiral cable.
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT I
1. Connect audio unit connector.
J
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
K
M46 15 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 4. L
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
YES >> INSPECTION END AV


minals.
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0
15

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO UNIT
Reference Values INFOID:0000000003468498
B
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES C
JSNIA1180ZZ
F
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
G
H
Ignition
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output.
(L) (B)
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output. K
(LG) (Y)
ON
SKIB3609E
L
Keep pressing SOURCE
0V
switch.
Ignition
6 15 Keep pressing switch. 1.0 V M
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(W) (SB)
ON
Keep pressing switch. 2.0 V
Except for above. 5.0 V AV
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(R)
ACC
O
Ignition P
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output.
(BR) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output.
(O) (P)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
15 Steering switch signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(SB) ground
ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
Ignition switch.
16 15 Steering switch signal B Input switch
Keep pressing VOL UP
(Y) (SB) ON 1.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 5.0 V
Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
33 AV communication signal Input/
Ground — — —
(G) (L) Output
Ground — — —
(R) (H) Output
35 — FM sub Input — — —
36 — AM-FM main Input — — —
Ignition
37 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
ACC

AUDIO UNIT
Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO — INFOID:0000000003465382
AV
JCNWM1833GB
P

AUDIO UNIT
JCNWM1834GB

AUDIO UNIT
AV
JCNWM1835GB

AUDIO UNIT
JCNWM1836GB

AUDIO UNIT
AV
JCNWM1837GB

AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000003470195
RELATED TO AUDIO
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
Audio unit malfunction.
No sound from all speakers.
Refer to AV-37, "Exploded View".
Audio sound is not heard.
Sound signal malfunction between audio unit and speaker
There is no sound from one of speakers.
on the side where there is no sound.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
• Antenna feeder.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Rod antenna.
• Antenna base.
• Audio display power supply and ground circuits.
Audio display does not work. — • AV communication circuits between audio unit and au-
dio display.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Inspection location / Probable malfunction location
Steering switch signal GND circuit.
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-23, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch.
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” switches of steer- Steering switch signal A circuit.
ing switch are not operational. Refer to AV-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN” switches of steering switch are not Steering switch signal B circuit.
operational. Refer to AV-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
A
NOTE: B
• Audio operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
• The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
C
NOISE
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
D
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves that reflect off mountains or buildings. E
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
F
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be easily found by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
G
Types of Noise and Possible Causes
Occurrence condition Possible cause

H
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
I
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground J
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line K
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit L
AV

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003671426
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors while ignition switch is
ON or engine is running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer.
Heavy vibration may activate the sensor(s), deploy the airbag(s), possibly cause serious injury.
When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always turn OFF ignition switch, disconnect the battery,
and wait 3 minutes or more before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003509002
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage at 7.0 V or less.
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before checking the cir-
cuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003509003
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000003509004
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening screws
PBIC0191E

AUDIO UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BASE AUDIO]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000003509006
B
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". C
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0770ZZ I
1. Audio unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
J
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003509007
REMOVAL K
1. Remove cluster lid C lower. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove instrument stay cover LH and instrument stay cover RH Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". L
3. Remove audio unit with an A/C auto amp. as a single unit from the body.
4. Remove bracket screws, and then remove audio unit.
INSTALLATION M
Install in the reverse order of removal.
AV

AUDIO DISPLAY
AUDIO DISPLAY
JPNIA0771ZZ
1. Audio display unit 2. Bracket 3. A/C display

4. Front cover
REMOVAL
1. Remove center ventilator assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove audio display unit and A/C display with bracket as a
single unit (1).
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove audio display unit.
JPNIA0772ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA0773ZZ
E
1. Front door speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "FRONT DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View". G
2. Remove front door speaker screws, then disconnect front door speaker connector and remove front door
speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA0774ZZ
1. Rear door speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View".
2. Remove rear door speaker screws, then disconnect rear door speaker connector and remove rear door
speaker.
INSTALLATION

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JPNIA0775ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove front squawker screws, lift up the front squawker and disconnect front squawker connector. Then
remove the front squawker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
Refer to ST-15, "Exploded View".

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-15, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION

ROOF ANTENNA
ROOF ANTENNA
A
JPNIA0776ZZ F
1. Rod antenna 2. Antenna base

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. G
H
REMOVAL
1. Remove headlining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT-
25, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View"[without sunroof] or INT-29, "SUNROOF : Exploded View" [with
sunroof]. I
2. Disconnect AM/FM main connector.
3. Remove antenna base nut, and then remove antenna base from roof panel.
J
INSTALLATION
K
Antenna base mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Be careful about tightening torque. When the antenna base mounting nut tightening torque is loose, L
the antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, the roof panel may be deformed.
AV

ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO)
Harness Layout INFOID:0000000003509052
JPNIA0777GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA0732GB M
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-192, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-509, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurring symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-192, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-509, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-
B
scription INFOID:0000000003579559
Always correct the center position of the rear view monitor's possible route line after disconnecting the battery
negative terminal. C
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-

cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003579560
D
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF REAR VIEW MONITOR'S POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE

Refer to the following for details. E
>> Refer to AV-47, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement". F
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description G
INFOID:0000000003579561
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of rear view monitor possible route line is corrected.
H
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000003579562
I
Refer to the following for details.
J
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST- K
MENT
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST- L
MENT : Description INFOID:0000000003579563
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted. M
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST-
MENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003579564
AV
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost positions. O
>> GO TO 2
2.DRIVING P
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> END

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
JSNIA1061GB
NOTE:
• Woofer, illustrated in the above figure, integrates two woofers and a woofer amp.
• In this section, PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH are written as the MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• An antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. and satellite
radio antenna is adopted. A
JSNIA1062GB
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
JSNIA1063GB
NOTE:
SWITCH.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• An antenna base integrated with radio antenna and satellite radio
antenna is adopted. A
JSNIA1062GB
D
MULTI AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

E
System name System explanation
AUDIO SYSTEM AV-60, "System Description"
F
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-57, "System Description"
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM AV-64, "System Description"
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM AV-67, "System Description" G
• Indicates the status of audio, climate control system, fuel econ-
omy and maintenance.
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM • AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
ceiving data signals through CAN communication from ECM,
H
combination meter and BCM.
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM Refer to “AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM” shown below.
I
• AV control unit functions by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise. J
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signals from ECM and combina-
tion meter. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Transmit-
ting/receiving of data signals are performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting K
and receives the response signal.
• AV control unit is connected with front display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required
signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from front display unit. It is also con-
nected with satellite radio by serial communication, transmits the operating signal and receives the display L
signal.
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis. M
• CONSULT-III self-diagnosis: refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• On board self-diagnosis: refer to AV-70, "Diagnosis Description".
On board self-diagnosis of TEL adapter unit can be performed.
• Refer to AV-87, "Diagnosis Description" for on board self-diagnosis. AV
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM

• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. O
• Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits
operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication.
Without DVD Entertainment System P
• The AUX image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks to the AV control unit. The AV control unit out-
puts AUX image signal to the front display unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• The AUX sound signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks to the AV control unit. The AV control unit out-
puts the AUX sound signal to BOSE amp. The BOSE amp. outputs the AUX sound signal to woofer and
each speaker.
JSNIA1186GB
With DVD Entertainment System

• The AUX sound signal input from the external input device is transmitted from auxiliary input jacks to DVD
player. DVD player transmits it to AV control unit. AV control unit transmits the AUX sound signal to BOSE
amp. The BOSE amp. outputs the AUX sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
• The AUX image signal input from the external input device is transmitted to the video distributor. The video
distributor transmits the AUX image signal to the AV control unit and rear display unit.
JSNIA1064GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1097ZZ
M
1. Center speaker 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. Satellite radio tuner AV
7. TEL adapter unit 8. BOSE amp. 9. Woofer
10. Rear view camera 11. Camera control unit 12. Rear speaker RH
Antenna base (antenna amp. and sat- O
13. 14. Rear door speaker RH 15. Rear display unit
ellite antenna)
16. Front door speaker RH 17. Front squawker RH 18. Microphone
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Steering switch 21. Auxiliary input jacks P
22. Video distributor 23. iPod connector 24. DVD player
25. iPod adapter 26. Preset switch 27. AV control unit
28. Multifunction switch 29. Front display unit
Luggage floor finisher is removed con- Luggage floor finisher is removed con- Luggage side finisher lower RH is re-
A. B. C.
dition dition moved condition
Console rear finisher is removed con-
D. Spiral cable part E. F. Console finisher is removed condition
dition

MULTI AV SYSTEM

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM, A/C auto amp. and combination meter via CAN com-
munication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
• It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con-
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
AV CONTROL UNIT parking brake).
• The camera image signal is input from the camera control unit. The AV control
unit outputs camera image signal to the front display unit.
• BOSE amp. ON signal and sound signal are transmitted to BOSE amp.
• Power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) is transmitted to front display unit.
Without DVD entertainment system
• Auxiliary image and auxiliary sound signals are input from the auxiliary input
jacks.
With DVD entertainment system
• Composite image signal (auxiliary and DVD images) is input from the video
distributor.
• Sound signal (DVD and auxiliary sounds) is input from the DVD player.
• It receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and
then transmits it to the AV control unit and rear display unit.
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR • Composite synchronize signal is output to rear display unit.
• It transmits the headphone ON signal to the rear display unit, and then receives
the remote controller operation signal from the rear display unit.
• Front display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control
unit.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit
and operates.
• RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB syn-
chronizing).
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Camera image signal is input from AV control unit.
• Auxiliary image signal is input from AV control unit.
• Composite image signal (auxiliary and DVD images) is input from the AV con-
trol unit.
• The rear display unit has functions of remote control receiver and headphone
amp.
• Transmits the headphone sound signal when receiving headphone ON signal
from the video distributor.
• Headphone sound signal is input from DVD player via wiring harnesses and
outputs the signal to headphones via infrared wireless communication.
• Receives the operation signal from the remote controller and transmits the sig-
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
nal to the video distributor via serial communication.
• Rear display image is controlled by the serial communication from video dis-
tributor.
• RGB image signal is input from video distributor (RGB image and RGB area).
Composite image signal (DVD and auxiliary images) is input from the video
distributor.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to video distributor.
• It transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor.
DVD PLAYER • It transmits the playback DVD sound signal to the AV control unit.
• It also transmits the input AUX sound signal to the AV control unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs
BOSE AMP. sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
• Woofer amp. ON signal is transmitted to woofer.
• Composed of two woofers and a woofer amp. B
WOOFER • Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp.
• Outputs low frequency sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. C
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range). D
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. E
REAR SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
F
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and aux-
iliary input operations are integrated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
• The multifunction switch is connected to the preset switch by wiring harness,
and it transmits the operation signal to the preset switch. G
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air
conditioner operations are integrated.
PRESET SWITCH • The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op- H
eration signals of the preset switch and multifunction switch.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness.
• Operations such as audio and hands-free phone are possible.
STEERING SWITCH I
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Used only when hands-free phone is operated.
MICROPHONE • Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to the TEL adapter unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the TEL adapter unit. J
• The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the
front display, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit. K
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS With DVD entertainment system
• The AUX image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the video distributor
to the AV control unit and rear display unit, and it outputs the AUX sound signal
to the DVD player. L
An antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. and satellite radio antenna
is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP. M
• Radio signal received by rod antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA AV
• Receives the satellite radio wave and outputs it to the satellite radio tuner.
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal
output to AV control unit. O
• Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera con-
nection recognition signal.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication. P
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit.
REAR VIEW CAMERA • It receives the power (camera ON signal) from the camera control unit and op-
erates.
Steering signal necessary for possible route line control is transmitted to camera
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
control unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to the AV control
unit.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
• It is connected with the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled
with the AV control unit.
TEL ANTENNA Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to the TEL adapter unit.
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to the AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communica-
tion signal and request signal).
• Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod®, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV con-
trol unit.
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows:
- between AV control unit and iPod adapter: AV communication.
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication.

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1068GB
G
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE H

• Power is supplied to rear view camera from camera control unit and outputs camera image signal to camera
control unit when selector lever is set to R position and the reverse signal on camera control unit is input.
• Camera control unit synthesizes guide lines and possible route lines with camera image signal from rear I
view camera, and transmits camera image signal to the AV control unit. In this case, since the reverse signal
is also input to AV control unit, the AV control unit recognizes that the selector lever is in the R position, and
it switches communication signal between AV control unit and front display unit, and image that is displayed
on the front display unit by RGB image signal with rear view monitor image. In addition, possible route lines J
are controlled by original sensor signal from steering angle sensor.
• The AV control unit determines whether rear view camera is equipped or not, based on the presence of cam-
era connection recognition signal. It switches to rear view monitor image at the time of reverse signal input K
when it is equipped.
• Warning message under the rear view monitor display is described by AV control unit.
• AV control unit is connected in communication with camera control unit and front display unit, and it controls
L
operation of rear view monitor system.
AV

JSNIA1097ZZ

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. Satellite radio tuner
Antenna base (antenna amp. and sat-
ellite antenna)
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Steering switch 21. Auxiliary input jacks
A. B. C.
dition


• Camera image signal is input from camera control unit, and it is output to front B
display unit when input reverse signal.
AV CONTROL UNIT • Image on display is changed to rear view monitor with the communication for
AV control unit and front display unit.
• Warning displayed in rear view monitor image is illustrated. C
• RGB image signal for warning display is input from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Rear view monitor image is changed with the serial communication for AV con- D
trol unit.
output to AV control unit. E
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication. F
erates.
G
control unit.
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1065GB
NOTE:
SWITCH.
radio antenna is adopted.
JSNIA1062GB
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function can be operated with the multifunc-
tion switch, preset switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to the front display unit.
Function
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD mode
iPod connection
AUX mode
DVD mode
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Operating Signal
• Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, and steering switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.

AUDIO SYSTEM
Screen Front Display
• The display switching of the screen is performed with the serial communication signal between the front dis- A
play unit and the AV control unit.
• The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
RGB image synchronizing signal.
B
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• AM/FM radio wave is received by rod antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp., and finally it is input to C
AV control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the back door window glass and the AV control unit is
received.
• Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit.
D
Satellite Radio Mode
• Satellite radio tuner is controlled by serial communication and request signal with AV control unit.
• Satellite radio wave is received by satellite radio antenna, and it is input to satellite radio tuner. Satellite radio
tuner outputs satellite radio sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit outputs satellite radio sound sig- E
nal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs the sound signal to each speaker and woofer.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit. F
• AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit.
iPod Connection G
• Connect iPod® and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter input iPod sound signal from iPod®.
When iPod mode is selected, iPod adapter output iPod sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit output
sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer and each speaker. H
• Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows:
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication. I
• The iPod® connection status can be recognized if iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition signal.
• The iPod adapter can charge iPod®.
J
AUX Mode
Refer to AV-51, "System Description".
DVD Mode K
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1097ZZ

ellite antenna)
A. B. C.
dition

AUDIO SYSTEM

• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. B
AV CONTROL UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT unit. C
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
D
• Composed of two woofers and a woofer amp.
• Outputs low frequency sound. E
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. F
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range). G
REAR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. H
CENTER SPEAKER
iliary input operations are integrated. I
and it transmits the operation signal to the preset switch.
J
PRESET SWITCH • The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op-
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness. K
• Operations such as audio and hands-free phone are possible.
STEERING SWITCH
An antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. and satellite radio antenna L
is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA BASE M
unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
• Receives the satellite radio wave and outputs it to the satellite radio tuner.
AV
tion signal and request signal). O
trol unit.
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod© operation signals are performed as follows: P

DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
JSNIA1069GB
The passengers can enjoy watching DVDs in the rear seat with the rear display unit. They can also listen to a
DVD and AUX in the rear seat independently by cordless headphones.
Operating Signal
The mobile entertainment system can be controlled by the rear seat remote controller.
It receives the operation signal of the rear seat remote controller by the rear display unit, and then transmits it
to the video distributor.
Screen Rear Display
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between rear display unit and video distributor.
• The rear display unit receives the DVD/AUX image signal and RGB image signal from the video distributor.
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between front display unit and AV control unit.
• The front display unit receives the DVD/AUX image signal from the AV control unit.
• The front display unit receives the RGB image signal from the AV control unit.
DVD Mode
• The DVD player is connected to the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled by the AV control
unit.
• The DVD player sound signal is output to the AV control unit. The AV control unit outputs DVD player sound
signal to BOSE amp. The BOSE amp. outputs it to woofer and each speaker.
• The DVD image signal is output to the video distributor. The video distributor outputs it to AV control unit and
rear display unit. The AV control unit output DVD image signal to front display unit.
AUX Mode

JSNIA1097ZZ
M

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. Satellite radio tuner AV
Antenna base (antenna amp. and sat- O
ellite antenna)
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Steering switch 21. Auxiliary input jacks P
A. B. C.
dition


trol.
AV CONTROL UNIT
parking brake).
distributor.
• It receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and
then transmits it to the AV control unit and rear display unit.
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR • Composite synchronize signal is output to rear display unit.
• It transmits the headphone ON signal to the rear display unit, and then receives
the remote controller operation signal from the rear display unit.
unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT chronizing).
• Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
trol unit.
amp.
• Headphone sound signal is input from DVD player via wiring harnesses and
outputs the signal to headphones via infrared wireless communication.
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
tributor.
distributor.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to the video distributor.
• It transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor.
DVD PLAYER • It transmits the playback DVD sound signal to the AV control unit.
• It also transmits the input AUX sound signal to the AV control unit.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
A
D
JSNIA1076GB

E
• TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit.

• The connection between portable telephone and TEL adapter unit is performed with Bluetooth™ communi- F
cation.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the TEL adapter unit to the AV control unit and output via BOSE
amp. to the front door speaker when operating the cellular phone.
G
• TEL adapter unit has the on board self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-87, "Diagnosis Description".
WHEN RECEIVING A CALL
TEL voice signal received with the portable telephone is input from TEL antenna via TEL adapter unit to AV H
control unit with Bluetooth™ communication and output via BOSE amp. to the front door speaker. The opera-
tion is performed with the steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation only).
WHEN A CALL IS TRANSMITTED I
Speech sounds (TEL voice signal) are input from the microphone to the TEL adapter unit. It is input from the
TEL antenna via Bluetooth™ communication to the portable telephone. It is transmitted to the phone on the
other side. The operation is performed with the steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation J
only).
AV

JSNIA1097ZZ

ellite antenna)
A. B. C.
dition


• Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from TEL adapter unit and B
outputs it to BOSE amp. during reception.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Connects with TEL adapter unit and AV communication and controls hands
free phone system.
C
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Inputs RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV
control unit and displays the status of hands free phone system.
Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from AV control unit and outputs
D
BOSE AMP.
it to front speaker.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Outputs the TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. E
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Adjust the sound when using hands-free phone system.
PRESET SWITCH • The operation signal is transmitted to the AV control unit via AV communica-
tion. F
• The hands-free phone system can be operated.
STEERING SWITCH
• Uses when operating the hands-free phone. G
MICROPHONE • Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to the TEL adapter unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the TEL adapter unit.
• Receives the steering switch signal (operation signal) from the steering switch. H
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna during reception and outputs it
to the AV control unit.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from microphone during speech recognition and
outputs it to the TEL antenna. I
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit.
TEL ANTENNA Connects with the portable telephone via Bluetooth™ and communicates the TEL
voice signal. J
AV

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-Diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “ ” switch of the 8-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
The disk eject switch cannot be checked.
JSNIA1072GB
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., if the screen does not dis-
play anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis
Self-Diagnosis
• Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.

Mode Description
A
The confirmation of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and shad-
Display Diagnosis
ing of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals B
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control* Not used.

C
System malfunctions and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Confirmation/ Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Adjustment that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
D
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed.
E
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of MULTI AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
F
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
NOTE: G
*: On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
STARTING PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control I
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing the “BACK” button. J
JSNIA1073GB
L
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected. M
AV
O
JSNIA0138GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE P

1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self-diagnosis”.
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch
operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot start up if any
malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between
AV control unit and multifunction switch.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
JSNIA0139GB
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-

pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.
Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green JSNIA1071GB
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV con-
trol unit internal error. Refer to AV-522, "Exploded View".
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > gray.
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0141GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot
be started up if any malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multi-
function switch.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart

Possible malfunction location / Action A

Diagnosis results Detection logic
to take
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting no D
unit power supply and ground circuits. malfunction in those components, re-
place AV control unit.
JSNIA1077GB
E
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in
unit display), connection malfunctions with other
connection unit may be displayed. F
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
malfunction”
G
When either one of the following items

are detected:
H
• serial communication circuits be-
tween AV control unit and front dis- Serial communication circuits between
play unit are malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
• serial communication signal between I
AV control unit and front display unit
is malfunctioning.
JSNIA1078GB
J
are detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply K
and ground circuits are malfunction-
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
ing.
and ground circuits.
• Serial communication circuits be- L
tween AV control unit and satellite ra-
tween AV control unit and satellite ra-
dio tuner are malfunctioning.
dio tuner.
• serial communication or request sig-
• Request signal circuit between AV
nal between AV control unit and sat-
control unit and satellite radio tuner. M
ellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV
JSNIA1079GB
control unit and satellite radio tuner is
malfunctioning.
AV

Possible malfunction location / Action
to take
are detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between
camera control unit and TEL adapter
unit.
unit are malfunctioning.
multifunction switch and camera con-
multifunction switch and camera con-
trol unit. (without DVD player mod-
trol unit are malfunctioning. (without
els)
DVD player models)
DVD player and camera control unit.
DVD player and camera control unit
(with DVD player models)
are malfunctioning. (with DVD player
models)
unit.
JSNIA1080GB camera control unit and TEL adapter
unit is malfunctioning.
multifunction switch and TEL adapter
• AV communication signal between
unit. (without rear view camera)
AV control unit and TEL adapter unit
is malfunctioning.
Malfunction is detected in camera-con- Camera connection recognition signal

nection recognition signal circuit. circuit.
JSNIA1081GB

are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and
ground circuits.
multifunction switch and iPod adapt-
multifunction switch and iPod adapt-
er are malfunctioning.
er.
AV control unit and iPod adapter is
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1082GB

are detected:
• DVD player power supply and
DVD player power supply and ground
circuits.
AV control unit and DVD player is
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1083GB

to take A

are detected: B
• rear display unit power supply and
• Rear display unit power supply and
ground circuits.
• Serial communication circuits be- C
tween video distributor and rear dis-
tween video distributor and rear dis-
play unit are malfunctioning.
play unit.
• serial communication signal between
video distributor and rear display unit
D
is malfunctioning.
JSNIA1084GB
E
are detected:
• Malfunction is detected in video dis- F
tributor power supply and ground cir- Video distributor power supply and
cuits. ground circuits.
AV control unit and video distributor G
is malfunctioning.
JSNIA1085GB H
Malfunction is detected in AV communi- AV communication circuits between

cation circuits between video distributor video distributor and DVD player mal-
J
and DVD player. function.
K
JSNIA1086GB
AV

to take
Malfunction is detected in AV communi- AV communication circuits between

cation circuits between multifunction multifunction switch and video distribu-
switch and video distributor. tor.
JSNIA1087GB
Malfunction is detected in AV communi-

AV communication circuits between
cation circuits between multifunction
multifunction switch and iPod adapter.
switch and iPod adapter.
JSNIA1174GB
NOTE:
The number of units that is displayed on the on board self-diagnosis display according to equipment.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “RETURN” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB

Display Diagnosis
A
JSNIA0688GB F
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB image signal error is detected.
G
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint
G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint H
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
I
the signals recognized by the system.
JSNIA0149GB
L
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks

M
ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied. AV
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights — O
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in the ACC position P
Shift the selector lever to the “R” po-
ON
sition
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than the “R” position
Speaker Test

Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control
On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
Refer to HAC-38, "CONSULT-III Function" [without 7 inch display].
Refer to HAC-157, "CONSULT-III Function" [with 7 inch display].
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
Display type of occur-

Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
Count up method B Other than the above
JSNIA0151GB
Error Item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take A

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN communication malfunction is detect-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ing to the diagnosis results.
ed. B
Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function
(MULTI AV)".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) C
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace the AV control unit.
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit D
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
When either one of the following items are
E
detected:
• front display unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Front display unit power supply and
• serial communication circuits between ground circuits. F
Front Display Connection Error
AV control unit and front display unit are • Serial communication circuits between
malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
• serial communication signal between AV
control unit and front display unit is mal- G
functioning.
detected: H
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Rear display unit power supply and
• serial communication circuits between ground circuits.
Rear Display Connection Error
video distributor and rear display unit are • Serial communication circuits between I
malfunctioning. video distributor and rear display unit.
video distributor and rear display unit is
malfunctioning. J
Malfunction is detected in camera connec- Camera-connection recognition circuit be-
Camera Control Unit Connection Error tion recognition circuit between AV control tween AV control unit and camera control
unit and camera control unit. unit. K
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
L
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
• serial communication circuits between
ground circuits.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner
• Serial communication circuits between
SAT Connection Error are malfunctioning. M
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
between AV control unit and satellite ra-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
dio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV control AV
unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunc-
tioning.
O
detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits. P
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
• AV communication signal between AV
control unit and multifunction switch is
malfunctioning.

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
detected:
• video distributor power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Video distributor power supply and ground
• Video Distributor Connection Error circuits.
control unit and video distributor is mal-
functioning.
detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning.
• DVD Deck Connection Error cuits.
control unit and DVD player is malfunc-
tioning.
detected:
• camera control unit power supply and
• Camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between mul-
control unit and camera control unit is
• Rearview Camera Connection Error tifunction switch and camera control unit.
malfunctioning.
(Without DVD entertainment system
• AV communication circuits between mul-
models)
tifunction switch and camera control unit
are malfunctioning. (Without DVD enter-
tainment system models)
detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and ground
circuits are malfunctioning. • iPod adapter power supply and ground
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between mul- circuits.
• iPod Connection Error tifunction switch and iPod adapter are • AV communication circuits between mul-
malfunctioning. tifunction switch and iPod adapter.
control unit and iPod adapter is malfunc-
tioning.
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between cam- ground circuits.
• H/F Unit Connection Error era control unit and TEL adapter unit are • AV communication circuits between cam-
malfunctioning. era control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit is mal-
functioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT tifunction switch and camera control unit.
• Rearview Camera Connection Error (without DVD player models)
are malfunctioning. (without DVD player
• AV communication circuits between DVD
• H/F Unit Connection Error* models)
player and camera control unit. (with
DVD player models)
player and camera control unit are mal-
functioning. (with DVD player models)
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
• DVD Deck Connection Error AV communication circuits between video
tion circuits between video distributor and
• Rearview Camera Connection Error distributor and DVD player.
DVD player.
• H/F Unit Connection Error

A
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Video Distributor Connection Error Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
AV communication circuits between multi-
• DVD Deck Connection Error tion circuits between multifunction switch
function switch and video distributor.
• Rearview Camera Connection Error and video distributor. B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Video Distributor Connection Error
• DVD Deck Connection Error
C
tion circuits between multifunction switch
• Rearview Camera Connection Error function switch and iPod adapter.
and iPod adapter.
• iPod Connection Error
• H/F Unit Connection Error D
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Switches Connection Error
• Rearview Camera Connection Error
When either one of the following items are E
• iPod Connection Error* detected: • AV communication circuits between AV
• H/F Unit Connection Error* • AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the branch point multi-
control unit and the branch point multifunction switch and AV control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Switches Connection Error
function switch and AV control unit are • Check and repair the short circuit in AV F
malfunctioning. communication circuits.
• Video Distributor Connection Error
• AV communication circuits are malfunc-
• DVD Deck Connection Error
tioning.
• Rearview Camera Connection Error G
• iPod Connection Error
*: Non-equipped item is not displayed.
H
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Connection Confirmation” and “Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera” are available.
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION I
The steering angle sensor, reverse signal and vehicle speed sensor
can be inspected.
L
JSNIA1088GB
M
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status
When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection
ON
mode is stopped when it is turned ON).
AV
Steer. Angle Sensor • Ignition switch at ACC.
OFF
• No steering with ignition switch ON.
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal.
O
ON Selector lever is in “R” with ignition switch ON.
• Ignition switch at ACC.
Reverse Sensor OFF
• Selector lever is in position other than “R” with ignition switch ON.
P
— Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal.
ON Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON.
• Ignition switch at ACC.
Vehicle Speed Sensor OFF
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON.
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal.
Side view Switch — Not used.

ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA
Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear-
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor cam-
era.
JSNIA0085GB
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis

• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the status is normal at the next ignition switch ON
cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if reset.
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
JSNIA0080GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• If it resets, the error counter is erased.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1089GB
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(RearCamera-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(DVD-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(Video Dist-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(Remote Cont-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(BTHF–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(iPod Adpt.–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(DVDAudio-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Delete Unit Connection Log

Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been A
removed)
JSNIA0154GB
D
Initialize Settings
Initializes the AV control unit memory.
G
JSNIA0155GB
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003356761 H
CONSULT-III functions
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit. I
Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked. J
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit. A connection diagnosis for the communication cir-
Self Diagnostic Result
cuit of the MULTI AV system and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed. K
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
L
Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter. M
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed. AV
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”. O
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item P

CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-89, "Description".
ed.

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Replace the AV control unit
Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200]
CAN CONT [U1216]
detected:
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
control unit and front display unit is mal-
functioning.
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Rear display unit power supply and
REAR DISP CONN [U1247]
video distributor and rear display unit are • Serial communication circuits between
malfunctioning. video distributor and rear display unit.
video distributor and rear display unit is
malfunctioning.
CAMERA CONT CONN [U1250] tion recognition circuit between AV control tween AV control unit and camera control
unit and camera control unit. unit.
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
• serial communication circuits between
ground circuits.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner
• Serial communication circuits between
SAT CONN [U1255] are malfunctioning.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
between AV control unit and satellite ra-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
dio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV control
unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunc-
tioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
malfunctioning.
detected:
• video distributor power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] Video distributor power supply and ground
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246] circuits.
control unit and video distributor is mal-
functioning.

A
detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. B
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] cuits.
control unit and DVD player is malfunc-
tioning.
C
detected:
• Camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. D
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between mul-
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] tifunction switch and camera control unit.
malfunctioning.
(Without DVD entertainment system
• AV communication circuits between mul- E
models)
is malfunctioning. (Without DVD enter-
tainment system models)
F
detected:
circuits are malfunctioning. • iPod adapter power supply and ground G
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between mul- circuits.
• IPod CONN [U1254] tifunction switch and iPod adapter are • AV communication circuits between mul-
malfunctioning. tifunction switch unit and iPod adapter.
• AV communication signal between AV H
control unit and iPod adapter is malfunc-
tioning.
When either one of the following items are I
detected:
ground circuits.
• AV communication circuits between cam-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between cam-
era control unit and TEL adapter unit. J
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] era control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
tifunction switch and TEL adapter unit.
(without rear view camera models)
control unit and TEL adapter unit is mal- K
functioning.
detected: L
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] tifunction switch and camera control unit.
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] (without DVD player models)
are malfunctioning. (without DVD player
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256]* models)
player and camera control unit. (with
M
DVD player models)
player and camera control unit are mal-
functioning. (with DVD player models)
AV
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] AV communication circuits between video
tion circuits between video distributor and
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] distributor and DVD player.
DVD player.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] O
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] AV communication circuits between multi-
tion circuits between multifunction switch P
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] function switch and iPod adapter.
and iPod adapter.
• IPod CONN [U1254]
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246] Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] tion circuits between multifunction switch
function switch and video distributor.
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] and video distributor.

• SWITCH CONN [U1240]
• IPod CONN [U1254]* When either one of the following items are
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256]* detected: • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and the branch point multi-
control unit and the branch point multifunction switch.
function switch. • Check and repair the short circuit in AV
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
• AV communication circuits are malfunc- communication circuits.
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
tioning.
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, the actual signal can be compared the condition recognized on the system.
Dis-
Display Item Vehicle status Remarks
play
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
On Parking brake is applied. mal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
On Light switch ON
ILLUM SIG
Off Light switch OFF
—
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R” posi-
On
tion Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
REV SIG
Shift the selector lever other than the mal.
Off
“R” position
SELECTION FROM MENU

Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
A
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS B

During on board diagnosis the diagnosis function of TEL adapter unit starts with the operation of the steering
switch and performs the diagnosis when ignition switch ACC.
On board diagnosis item C
The on board diagnosis has 3 modes: the self-diagnosis mode that performs the trouble diagnosis, the
speaker adaptation data deleting mode and the hands-free phone system initialization mode.
CAUTION: D
• Perform the diagnosis with the vehicle stopped.
• Perform STEP2 if necessary.
E
STEP MODE Description
• The self-diagnosis mode performs the microphone test.
• The self-diagnosis mode also diagnoses TEL adapter unit, TEL
STEP1 Self-diagnosis antenna and steering switch. F
• Those results are indicated with voice guidance and displayed
on the screen.
Speaker adaptation data deleting

The speaker adaptation data deleting mode can delete the speaker G
adaptation data.
STEP2
Hands-free phone system initialization mode can perform the ini-
Hands-free phone system initialization
tialization of hands-free phone system. H
Self-diagnosis results
Self-diagnosis mode reads out the self-diagnosis results and indicates DTC on the display.
NOTE: I
• Error count is read out simultaneously when reading out the DTC name.
• The errors are read out continuously when some errors occur at the same time. The DTC displays are com-
bined and displayed. For example, DTC 01100 is displayed when DTC 01000 and DTC 00100 are indicated J
at the same time.
Self-diagnosis results
DTC DTC name Possible causes K
DTC 10000 INTERNAL FAILURE TEL adapter unit
DTC 01000 ANT. SHORT TO BATT OR OPEN
TEL antenna L
DTC 00100 ANT. SHORT TO GROUND
DTC 00010 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK A
Steering switch
DTC 00001 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK B
M
DTC 00000 THERE ARE NO FAILURE RECORDS TO REPORT —
The details of error count

The error count guides “0” when the error occurs. The next time it counts up “1” if it is normal with the ignition AV
switch ON. It continues the count up unless the initialization of hands-free phone system is performed.

FLOW CHART OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
JSNIA1181GB

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. D
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-25, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003356764
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON- F

DTC Diagnostic item is detected when... Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system. G
more.

H
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
I
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-40, "Intermittent Incident".
AV

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON-

SULT-III
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.
1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit.
>> INSPECTION END

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-522, "Exploded View". B

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control C
• It is connected to ECM, A/C auto amp. and combination meter via CAN com- D
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con- E
trol.
• The camera image signal is input from the camera control unit. The AV control F
• Power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) is transmitted to front display.
G
jacks.
With DVD entertainment system H
distributor.
I
J
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 Replace AV control unit. K
[U1310] circuit.
AV

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-522, "Exploded View".

trol.
• The camera image signal is input from the camera control unit. The AV control
jacks.
distributor.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM Replace AV control unit.
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]

A

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control C
• It is connected to ECM, A/C auto amp. and combination meter via CAN com- D
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con- E
trol.
• The camera image signal is input from the camera control unit. The AV control F
G
jacks.
With DVD entertainment system H
distributor.
I
J
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
U1216 Replace AV control unit. K
[U1216] detected.
AV

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

unit.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit
and operates.
chronizing).
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Auxiliary image signal is input from AV control unit.
trol unit.
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items are detected:
• front display unit power supply and ground circuits are • Front display unit power supply and
malfunctioning. ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN
U1243 • serial communication circuits between AV control unit • Serial communication circuits be-
[U1243]
and front display unit are malfunctioning. tween AV control unit and front dis-
• serial communication signal between AV control unit play unit.
and front display unit is malfunctioning.
1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check front display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-103, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Front display unit AV control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
11 56
M49 M129 Existed
22 44
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground.
Front display unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M49 Not existed
22

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
YES >> GO TO 3. A
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
B
1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
C
(+)
Front display unit (−) Condition Signal
D
Connector Terminal
When adjusting display bright

M49 11 Ground
ness.
F
PKIB5039J
Is the inspection result normal? G

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
H
Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
I
(+)
Connector Terminal J
K
M49 22 Ground
ness.
L
PKIB5039J
Is the inspection result normal? M

NO >> Replace front display unit.
AV

U1247 REAR DISP CONN

amp.
• Headphone sound signal is input from DVD player via hard wires and outputs
the signal to headphones via infrared wireless communication.
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
tributor.
distributor.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to video distributor.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
• rear display unit power supply and ground circuits are • Rear display unit power supply and
malfunctioning. ground circuits.
REAR DISP CONN
U1247 • serial communication circuits between video distributor • Serial communication circuits be-
[U1247]
and rear display unit are malfunctioning. tween video distributor and rear
• serial communication signal between video distributor display unit.
and rear display unit is malfunctioning.
1.CHECK REAR DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check rear display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-104, "REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis
Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY SERIAL COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect rear display unit connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and video distributor harness connector.
Rear display unit Video distributor

Continuity
9 39
R152 M257 Existed
10 40
4. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and ground.

Rear display unit A

Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
9
R152 Not existed B
10
YES >> GO TO 3. C
3.CHECK SERIAL COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
D
1. Connect rear display unit connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
E
(+)
F
Connector Terminal
G
Rear seat remote controller opera-
R152 9 Ground
tion.
H
PKIB5039J
Is the inspection result normal? I

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace rear display unit.
4.CHECK SERIAL COMMUNICATION SIGNAL J
Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
K
(+)
Connector Terminal L
M
R152 10 Ground
tion.
AV
PKIB5039J

O
NO >> Replace video distributor.
P

U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT

output to AV control unit.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAMERA CONT. CONN Malfunction is detected in camera-connection recognition Camera-connection recognition sig-
U1250
[U1250] signal circuit. nal circuit.
1.CHECK CAMERA-CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and camera control unit harness connector.
AV control unit Camera control unit

Continuity
M130 68 B60 14 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M130 68 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> Replace camera control unit.

U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
B
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER C
tion signal and request signal).
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003356779 D
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT-III
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuits
and ground circuits. F
are malfunctioning.
• Serial communication circuits be-
• serial communication circuits between AV control unit
SAT CONN tween AV control unit and satellite
U1255 and satellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
[U1255] radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal between AV
control unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
• Request signal circuit between AV G
control unit and satellite radio tun-
• request signal circuit between AV control unit and sat-
er.
ellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
H
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT I

Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-109, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT K
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector terminals and satellite radio tuner harness L
connector terminals.
AV control unit Satellite radio tuner M

Continuity
28 8
AV
30 10
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector terminals and ground. O
AV control unit
Continuity P
Connector Terminals
28 Ground
M128 29 Not existed
30
YES >> GO TO 3.

3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
28
M128 Ground 7.0 V
29
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
5. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector terminal ground.
(+)
Voltage
Satellite radio tuner
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B48 10 Ground 7.0 V
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
D
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
are malfunctioning. and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300] E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and • AV communication circuits be-
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
multifunction switch are malfunctioning. tween AV control unit and multi-
[U1240]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and function switch.
multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
F
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• video distributor power supply and ground circuits are
U1300 [U1300] Video distributor power supply and
malfunctioning.
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN ground circuits.
[U1246]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and G
video distributor is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• DVD player power supply and ground circuits are mal- H
U1300 [U1300] DVD player power supply and ground
functioning.
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN circuits.
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and
[U1248]
DVD player is malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are detected: I
• camera control unit power supply and ground circuits • Camera control unit power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT are malfunctioning. and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300] • AV communication signal between AV control unit and • AV communication circuits be- J
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN camera control unit is malfunctioning. tween multifunction and camera
CONN [U1252] • AV communication circuits between multifunction and control unit. (Without DVD enter-
camera control unit is malfunctioning. (Without DVD en- tainment system models)
tertainment system models) K
• iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits are mal- • iPod adapter power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT functioning. ground circuits.
U1300 L
[U1300] • AV communication circuits between multifunction • AV communication circuits be-
U1254
• IPod CONN [U1254] switch and iPod adapter are malfunctioning. tween multifunction switch unit and
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
iPod adapter is malfunctioning. M
When either one of the following items are detected: ground circuits.
• TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuits are • AV communication circuits be-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
malfunctioning. tween camera control unit and TEL
AV
U1300 [U1300]
• AV communication circuits between camera control unit adapter unit.
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN
and TEL adapter unit are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits be-
[U1256]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and tween multifunction switch and TEL O
TEL adapter unit is malfunctioning. adapter unit. (without rear view
camera models)
• AV communication circuits be-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When either one of the following items are detected: P
tween multifunction switch and
[U1300] • AV communication circuits between multifunction
U1300 camera control unit. (without DVD
• REAR CAMERA LAN switch and camera control unit are malfunctioning.
U1252 player models)
CONN [U1252] (without DVD player models)
• AV communication circuits be-
U1256* • HAND FREE CONN • AV communication circuits between DVD player and
tween DVD player and camera
camera control unit are malfunctioning. (with DVD play-
[U1256]* er models)
control unit. (with DVD player mod-
els)

Display contents of
CONSULT-III
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300 • DVD DECK CONN
U1248 [U1248] Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be- AV communication circuits between
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN tween video distributor and DVD player. video distributor and DVD player.
U1256 CONN [U1252]
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
• VIDEO DIST CONN
U1300
[U1246]
U1246 AV communication circuits between
• DVD DECK CONN Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be-
U1248 multifunction switch and video distrib-
[U1248] tween multifunction switch and video distributor.
U1252 utor.
• REAR CAMERA LAN
U1256
CONN [U1252]
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
• VIDEO DIST CONN
U1300
[U1246]
U1246
• DVD DECK CONN AV communication circuits between
U1248 Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be-
[U1248] multifunction switch and iPod adapt-
U1252 tween multifunction switch and iPod adapter.
• REAR CAMERA LAN er.
U1254
CONN [U1252]
U1256
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300
• SWITCH CONN
U1240
[U1240]
U1254*
• IPod CONN [U1254]*
U1256* • HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]*
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits be-
[U1300] tween AV control unit and the
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and
• SWITCH CONN branch point multifunction switch.
the branch point multifunction switch.
U1300 [U1240] • Check and repair the short circuit in
• AV communication circuits are malfunctioning.
U1240 • VIDEO DIST CONN AV communication circuits.
U1246 [U1246]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN
U1252 [U1248]
U1254 • REAR CAMERA LAN
U1256 CONN [U1252]
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]
NOTE:

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356782
B
1.CHECK FUSE
C
Battery 35
D
Ignition switch ON or START 3
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

G
M127
ACC power supply 7 ACC Battery voltage H
Ignition signal M131 104 ON
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT J
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
K
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
M127 20
Ground OFF Existed L
M131 85
YES >> INSPECTION END M
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356783
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY SIDE) O

Check voltage between front display unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) P
Inverter VCC 2
M49 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)

2. Disconnect the harness connector between front display unit and AV control unit.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector M49 and AV control unit harness connector
M129.
Signal name Display unit (M49) AV control unit (M129) Continuity

Inverter VCC 2 59 Existed
Signal VCC 3 47 Existed
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector M49 and ground.
Signal name Display unit (M49) — Continuity

Inverter VCC 2 Ground Not existed
Signal VCC 3 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
Inverter VCC 59
M129 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 47
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connectors and ground.
Ground M49 1 OFF Existed
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509245
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 35
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
Check voltage between rear display unit harness connector and ground.
B
3
Battery power supply R152 OFF
4 Battery voltage C
ACC power supply R152 6 ACC
YES >> GO TO 3. D
NO >> Check harness between rear display unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT E
2. Disconnect rear display unit connector.
F
1
Ground R152 OFF Existed G
2
YES >> INSPECTION END H
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
I
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509246
1.CHECK FUSE J
Power source Fuse No. K

Battery 35
Ignition switch ON or START 3 L

YES >> GO TO 2. M
Check voltage between video distributor harness connector and ground. AV
Battery power supply 54 OFF O
ACC power supply M255 55 ACC Battery voltage
Ignition signal 56 ON
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between video distributor and fuse.
2. Disconnect video distributor connector.

3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and ground.
15
M258
16
Ground OFF Existed
M256 51
M255 53
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509247
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 35
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between DVD player harness connector and ground.
M254 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between DVD player and fuse.
2. Disconnect DVD player connector.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector and ground.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356784
1.CHECK FUSE

Power source Fuse No. A

B
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C
Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.
F
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
G
H
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509248
J
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses. K
Battery 23, 24
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. M
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
AV
10
Battery power supply B224 OFF Battery voltage O
11
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

7
Ground B224 OFF Existed
12
WOOFER
WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509249
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 25
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
Battery power supply B28 6 OFF Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between woofer amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect woofer amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
Ground B28 5 OFF Existed
iPod ADAPTER
iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509250
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 35
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

Check voltage between iPod adapter harness connector and ground.
B
Is the inspection result normal? C
NO >> Check harness between iPod adapter and fuse.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER D
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356788
E
1.CHECK FUSE
F
Battery 35
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19 G

YES >> GO TO 2. H
Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground. I
Battery power supply 12 OFF J
B48 Battery voltage
K
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner.
3. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground. M
Ground B48 15 OFF Existed AV
NO >> Repair harness or connector. O
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356789 P
1.CHECK FUSE


Battery 35
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
ACC power supply B39 2 ACC Battery voltage
Ignition signal 3 ON
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between TEL adapter unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
Ground B39 4, 14, 20, 24 OFF Existed

RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
A
UNIT)
B
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB image signal to the front display unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
E
Continuity
M49 17 M129 40 Existed F
Front display unit

G
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M49 17 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
Start confirmation/adjustment M
mode, and then display color bar
M49 17 Ground
by selecting “Color Spectrum Bar”
on DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS screen.
AV
SKIB2238J

YES >> Replace front display unit. O

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
Start confirmation/adjustment
M49 6 Ground
SKIB2236J

YES >> Replace front display unit.

RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Continuity
Front display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
M49 18 Ground
AV
SKIB2237J


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the front display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed
with AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 19 Ground —
SKIB3603E


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to front dis-
play unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

D
E

Continuity
F
G
Front display unit
Continuity
H
M49 9 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
When RGB image is displayed. Approx. 5.0 V
M
M49 9 Ground
When AUX image is displayed. AV
PKIB4948J O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. P

HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
In composite image (DVD image, AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal
and horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the
RGB images displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 8 Ground —
SKIB3603E

YES >> Replace AV control unit.

VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
In composite image (DVD, AUX and camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and hori- B
zontal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB
images displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509197 C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

E
Continuity
G
Front display unit
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL

1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
K
(+)
M
M49 20 Ground —
AV
SKIB3598E

O
P

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT
DISPLAY UNIT)

AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal and AUX image signal transmits the composite image sig-
nal to the front display unit.
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
AV control unit receives the image signal from the video distributor and camera control unit and then transmits
the composite image signal (AUX, DVD and camera image) to the front display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and front display unit harness connector.
AV control unit Front display unit

Continuity
36 15
M129 M49 Existed
37 4
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check signal between front display harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+) (−)
Front display unit Front display unit Condition Signal
When AUX, DVD or camera image

M49 15 M49 4
is displayed on front display.
SKIB2251J


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO AV
A
CONTROL UNIT)
B
Video distributor receives the image signal from the DVD player and auxiliary input jack and then transmits it to
the AV control unit and rear display unit.
C

D
2. Disconnect video distributor connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
Video distributor AV control unit

Continuity
F
8 66
M258 M130 Existed
6 74
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. G
AV control unit
Continuity H
M130 66 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect video distributor connector and AV control unit connector.

3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector using an oscilloscope. K
(+) (−)
L
AV control unit AV control unit Condition Signal
M

M130 66 M130 74
AV
SKIB2251J O
NO >> Replace video distributor. P

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR
DISPLAY UNIT)
Video distributor receives the image signal from the DVD player and auxiliary input jack and then transmits it to
the AV control unit and rear display unit.

2. Disconnect video distributor connector and rear display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and rear display unit harness connector.
Video distributor Rear display unit

Continuity
M257 34 R152 14 Existed
Rear display unit

Continuity
R152 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect video distributor connector and rear display unit connector.
3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Rear display unit (−) Condition Signal
Connector Terminal

R152 14 Ground
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace rear display unit.

RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmit the image displayed with video distributor with RGB signal to the rear display unit.
C
E
Continuity
R152 22 M257 25 Existed F
Rear display unit

G
Continuity
R152 22 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
K
(+)
Rear seat remote controller opera- M

R152 22 Ground tion when AUX or DVD image is
displayed on rear display unit.
AV
JSNIA0984ZZ

YES >> Replace rear display unit. O

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
R152 21 M257 26 Existed
Rear display unit

Continuity
R152 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal

JSNIA0984ZZ


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
C
E
Continuity
Rear display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
K
(+)
Rear seat remote controller opera- M

AV
JSNIA1090ZZ

YES >> Replace rear display unit. O

COMPOSITE SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO
REAR DISPLAY UNIT)
COMPOSITE SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT)
Transmit the composite synchronizing signal to the rear display unit so as to synchronize the composite image
displayed with video distributor.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
R152 13 M257 33 Existed
Rear display unit

Continuity
R152 13 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
When AUX or DVD image is dis-

R152 13 Ground
played on rear display unit.
SKIB0825E


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by video distributor with RGB area (YS) signal to rear dis-
play unit.
C

D
E

Continuity
F
R152 15 M257 32 Existed
G
Rear display unit
Continuity
H
R152 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
J
K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
When AUX or DVD image is dis-
0V
played on rear display unit.
M
R152 15 Ground Rear seat remote controller opera- AV

tion when AUX or DVD image is
O
PKIB4948J

YES >> Replace rear display unit. P

VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
In composite image (DVD and AUX images), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal from rear display unit to video distributor so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with video distributor such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.


Continuity
R152 17 M257 29 Existed
Rear display unit

Continuity
R152 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
R152 17 Ground —
SKIB3598E

YES >> Replace video distributor.

HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
HP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
A
In composite image (DVD and AUX images), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizontal B
synchronizing (HP) signal from rear display unit to video distributor so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with video distributor such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.

E
Continuity
G
Rear display unit
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.

1. Connect rear display unit connector and video distributor connector. J
K
(+)
M
R152 18 Ground —
AV
SKIB3601E

O
P

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : Description INFOID:0000000003509223
• Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
• AV control unit transmits the image signal that is input to the front display unit.
WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509224
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AUX INPUT JACKS AND AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks AV control unit

Continuity
7 66
M253 M130 Existed
8 74
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
AV control unit
Continuity
M130 66 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL (AUX INPUT JACKS TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect auxiliary connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+) (−)
When AUX image is displayed on

M130 66 M130 74
front display.
SKIB2251J

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT AND FRONT DISPLAY UNIT)

AV control unit Front display unit A

Continuity
36 15
M129 M49 Existed B
37 4
C
Front display unit
Continuity
D
M49 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4. E
4.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector. F
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
G
(+) (−)
H
I
When AUX image is displayed on
M49 15 M49 4
front display.
J
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? K

WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM L
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : Description INFOID:0000000003509221
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to video distributor. M
WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003509222
AV
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and video distributor connector. O
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and video distributor harness connec-
tor.
P
Auxiliary input jacks Video distributor
Continuity
7 19
M253 M258 Existed
8 21
4. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and ground.

Video distributor
Continuity
M258 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check signal between video distributor harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+) (−)
Video distributor Video distributor Condition Signal
M258 19 M258 21 When AUX image is displayed.
SKIB2251J


DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
The DVD player transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor. The video distributor B
receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and then transmits it to the AV control
unit and rear display.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect DVD player connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector and video distributor harness connector.
E
DVD player Video distributor
Continuity
7 23 F
M254 M258 Existed
5 22
4. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and ground. G
Video distributor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground H
M258 23 Not existed
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DVD IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect DVD player connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check signal between video distributor harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. K
(+)
Video distributor (−) Condition Signal L
Connector Terminal
M258 23 Ground When DVD image is displayed.

AV
SKIB2251J
O
NO >> Replace DVD player. P

DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Multifunction switch AV control unit

Continuity
M125 14 M131 103 Existed
Multifunction switch
Continuity
M125 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M131 103 Ground 3.3 V
YES >> Replace preset switch.

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Supply power from TEL adapter unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the micro- B
phone.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TEL ADAPTER UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
TEL adapter unit Microphone E

Continuity
7 1
F
B39 8 R20 2 Existed
29 4
4. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. G
TEL adapter unit

Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
7
B39 Not existed
29 I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. J
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect TEL adapter unit connector.
K
3. Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit
(Approx.)
B39 29 B39 8 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
NO >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between TEL adapter unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
P

(+) (−)
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit Condition Signal
B39 7 B39 8 Give a voice
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
NO >> Replace microphone.

CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
TEL adapter unit identifies the vehicle model according to the control signal and performs the control. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. D
TEL adapter unit

Continuity E
Connector Terminals
Ground
20
B39 Existed
24 F
YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. G
AV

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CON-
TROL UNIT)
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA
CONTROL UNIT)
• Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image sig-
nal from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the AV
control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec-
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
B60 6 D192 3 Existed
4. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
Camera control unit

Continuity
B60 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Signal
Connector Terminal
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-

B60 6 Ground
tion.
SKIB2251J

NO >> Replace rear view camera.

CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
• Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image sig- B
control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec- E
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera F

Continuity
4. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground. G
Camera control unit

Continuity H
B60 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL J
K
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
L
Camera control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi- M
B60 8 Ground 6.0 V
tion.
YES >> Replace rear view camera. AV
NO >> Replace camera control unit.

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CON-
TROL UNIT)
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV
CONTROL UNIT)
control unit.

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Camera control unit AV control unit

Continuity
12 65
B60 M130 Existed
11 64
Camera control unit

Continuity
B60 12 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
(+)
Connector Terminal

B60 12 Ground
tion.
SKIB2251J


STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to B
the camera control unit.
• Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to the camera con-
trol unit.
• Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed C
signal.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor harness con-
nector.
F
Camera control unit Steering angle sensor
Continuity
G
23 3
B60 24 M30 6 Existed
25 8 H
I
Camera control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
23 Ground J
B60 24 Not existed
25
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
1. Connect camera control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
3. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) AV
Reference value
Camera control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals
O
23
B60 24 Ground 5.0 V
25 P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
2. Connect steering angle sensor connector.

(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminals
Turn the steering to the right
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
23, 24 Ground
B60 Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Turn the steering around the

25 Ground
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.

A
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C

1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
AV control unit Spiral cable
Continuity
E
F
AV control unit
Continuity
G
M127 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
M127 6 M127 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.


minals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.
JSNIA0216GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
nector nal nector nal
switch ON 709 – 737
MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
14 ON
MENU UP switch ON 119 – 123
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0
15 VOL UP switch ON 119 – 123


A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C

D
Continuity
E
F
AV control unit
Continuity
G
M127 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M127 16 M127 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.


JSNIA0216GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
14 ON
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0


A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C

D
Continuity
E
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE G
Check spiral cable.

Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT I
J
AV control unit
Continuity
K
M127 15 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4. L
M
AV


JSNIA0216GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
14 ON
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 0


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
AV CONTROL UNIT
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM C
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On

VHCL SPD SIG D
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off
Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On

PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off
E
Ignition switch Light switch ON On
ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch F
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC G
Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On
REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA0009ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) M
+ – Signal name
Output
0V
switch. AV
Ignition
6 15
Steering switch signal A Input switch Keep pressing switch. 1.3 V
(BR) (L) O
ON
Keep pressing 2.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 3.3 V P
Ignition
7
(R)
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
(R) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
15
Ground Steering switch signal GND — switch — 0V
(L)
ON
0V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing VOL UP
16 15 0.7 V
Steering switch signal B Input switch switch.
(G) (L)
ON

Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(G) (B) LH is selected.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Input switch
(W) (R) RH is selected.
ON
SKIB3609E
25 — Shield — — — —
26 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(R) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9299J
Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(W) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9300J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
30 Communication signal When satellite radio mode C
Ground Output switch
(B) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9301J D
33 — FM sub Input — — —
34 — AM–FM main Input — — —
E
Ignition
ACC
F
Without DVD player
models
• Composite image signal
(AUX/Camera image) Ignition
36 37 When composite image is G
Output switch
(L) (P) With DVD player models displayed.
ON
(DVD/AUX/Camera im-
H
age) SKIB2251J
Ignition
37
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(P) I
ON
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis- J
Ignition
38 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Output switch
(Y) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
K
SKIB2237J
L
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
39 RGB image signal (G: play color bar by selecting
(L) green)
ON
“Color Spectrum Bar” on M
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
AV
Ignition O
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Output switch
(G) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
P
SKIB2238J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
41
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(B)
ON
SKIB3603E
42 — Shield — — — —
When RGB image is dis-
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(W) When AUX or camera im-
ON
age is displayed.
PKIB4948J
Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(G) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
45 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(G) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
Ignition
46
Ground Signal GND — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
Ignition
47 Signal VCC (front display
Ground Output switch — 9.0 V
(O) unit power supply)
ACC
49 — Shield — — — —
50 — Shield — — — —
55 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(R) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
57 Vertical synchronizing (VP) C
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E D
Ignition
58
Ground Inverter GND — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON E
Ignition
59 Inverter VCC (front display
Ground Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y) unit power supply)
ACC
F
Ignition
Shield (camera image
64 Ground — switch — 0V
ground)
ON
G
Ignition H
65 when rear view camera im-
64 Camera image signal Input switch
(W) age is displayed.
ON
I
SKIB2251J
Without DVD player

When AUX image is dis-
models
• AUX image signal
played. J
66 74 Ignition
(Y)*1 (B)*1 Input switch
With DVD player models ON
(L)*3 (R)*3 When DVD or AUX image K
is displayed.
(DVD/AUX image)
SKIB2251J
Connected to camera con-

0V
L
Ignition trol unit connector.
68 Camera-connection recog-
Ground Input switch
(P) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector. M
73 — Shield — — — —
Without DVD player
models AV
74 • AUX image signal
(B)*1 ground Ignition
*2 Ground — switch — 0V
(BR) With DVD player models ON O
(R)*3 • Composite image signal
ground
(DVD/AUX image)
P
Ignition During voice guide output

80 79
TEL voice signal Input switch
(R) (L) with the switch pressed.
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
81 — Shield — — — —
Without DVD player
models When iPod mode is select-
• Sound signal RH (iPod ed
sound) Ignition
83 82
Input switch
(R) (W)
With DVD player models ON
When iPod, DVD or AUX
• Sound signal RH (iPod,
mode is selected
DVD and AUX sound)
SKIB3609E
Ignition
85
(B)
ON
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
Ignition
95*4 97*4 AUX sound signal RH Input switch
When AUX mode is select-
(R) (W) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
96*4 97*4 AUX sound signal LH Input switch
When AUX mode is select-
(B) (W) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
97*4 Ground AUX sound signal ground — switch — 0V
(W) ON
Without DVD player
models When iPod mode is select-
• Sound signal RH (iPod ed
99 98 Ignition
sound)
(BR)*4 (L)*4 Input switch
(B)*3 (G)*3 With DVD player models ON
When iPod, DVD or AUX
• Sound signal RH (iPod,
mode is selected
DVD and AUX sound)
SKIB3609E
100 — Shield — — — —

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
101
Ground SW ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON
103 Pressing the eject switch 0V C

Ground Eject signal Input —
(W) Except for above 3.3 V
Ignition
104
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage D
(G)
ON
Ignition The “R” position 12.0 V
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch E
(SB) Other than the “R” position 0V
ON
Ignition Parking brake ON 0V
106
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G)
ON Parking brake OFF 5.0 V F
NOTE:
Maximum voltage may be 12 V
due to specifications (connected G
units).
Ignition
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch H
(V) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
I
SKIA6649J
J
Ignition
108 114
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Voice output
(V) (LG)
ON K
SKIB3609E
Ignition
109 115 M
Sound signal front RH Output switch Voice output
(B) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E
AV
Ignition
110
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(P)
ON O
111 — Shield — — — —

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
112 118 Ignition

(O)*1 (SB)*1 Sound signal rear LH Output switch Voice output
(L)*2 (R)*2 ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
113 119
Sound signal front LH Output switch Voice output
(G) (R)
ON
SKIB3609E
NOTE:
• *1: Without DVD player models (Type A).
• *2: Without DVD player models (Type B).
• *3: With DVD player models.
• *4: Only for models without DVD player.
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION WITHOUT DVD ENTER-

TAINMENT SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003457756
NOTE:
SWITCH.
• Type A: Up to VIN: JN8AZ18U*9W100000, JN8AZ18W*9W200000 (EXCEPT FOR MEXICO),
JN8AZ18U*9W710000, JN8AZ18W*9W810000 (FOR MEXICO)

AV CONTROL UNIT
• Type B: From VIN: JN8AZ18U*9W100001, JN8AZ18W*9W200001 (EXCEPT FOR MEXICO),
JN8AZ18U*9W710001, JN8AZ18W*9W810001 (FOR MEXICO) A
AV
JCNWM1855GB P

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1856GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1857GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1858GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1859GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1860GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1861GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1862GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1863GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1864GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1865GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1866GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1867GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1868GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1869GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1870GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1871GB
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION WITH DVD ENTERTAIN- P

MENT SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003557518
NOTE:

AV CONTROL UNIT
In this section, PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH are written as the MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH.
JCNWM1872GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1873GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1874GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1875GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1876GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1877GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1878GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1879GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1880GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1881GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1882GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1883GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1884GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1885GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1886GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1887GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1888GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1889GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1890GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1891GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1892GB
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003457508
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM
DTC Display item Refer to

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-89, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-90, "Diagnosis Procedure"

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-91, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] AV-92, "DTC Logic"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-93, "DTC Logic" B
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-94, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1247 REAR DISP CONN [U1247] AV-96, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1250 CAMERA CONT CONN [U1250] AV-98, "Diagnosis Procedure" C
U1255 SAT CONN [U1255] AV-99, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-101, "Description" D
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
AV-101, "Description"
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
E
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
AV-101, "Description" F
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
U1254 • IPod CONN [U1254]
G
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] AV-101, "Description" H
* *
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248] I
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] J
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
U1254 • IPod CONN [U1254] K
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246] L
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248] AV-101, "Description"
M
U1254* • IPod CONN [U1254]*
U1256* • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]* AV
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246] O
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248] AV-101, "Description"
U1254 • IPod CONN [U1254]
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256] P
NOTE:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(O)
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image GND — switch — 0V
(P)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch
(L) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
7 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground Output switch —
(G) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When RGB image is dis- B
5.0 V
played
Ignition
C
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(W) When AUX image is dis-
ON
played
D
PKIB4948J
Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display F
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter GND — switch — 0V
(BR) H
ON
Ignition
14
Ground Signal GND — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON I
Ignition J
15 4 When AUX image is dis-
Composite image signal Input switch
(L) (P) played
ON
K
SKIB2251J
Start confirmation/adjust- L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
M
screen.
SKIB2238J
AV
Ignition
18 play color bar by selecting O
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch
(Y) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
P

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(B)
ON
SKIB3603E
Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
(R) signal
On
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —

NOTE:
SWITCH.

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1855GB P

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1856GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1857GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1858GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1859GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1860GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1861GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1862GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1863GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1864GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1865GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1866GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1867GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1868GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1869GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1870GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1871GB

NOTE:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH.
JCNWM1872GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1873GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1874GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1875GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1876GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1877GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1878GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1879GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1880GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1881GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1882GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1883GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1884GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1885GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1886GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1887GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1888GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1889GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1890GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1891GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1892GB

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA1223ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
H
Ignition
1 2 Sound signal front squawk-
Output switch Sound output.
(LG) (V) er LH
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Sound output. K
(P) (L) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E L
Ignition M
5 6 Sound signal rear speaker
(Y) (BR) RH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
Ground Ground — switch — 0V O
ON
Ignition
10
(SB) P
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(GR) (BR) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
14 9 Sound signal rear door
(L) (O) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
16 17
Sound signal woofer Output switch Sound output.
(B/R) (W/R)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
18 19 Sound signal front door
(W) (B) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
20
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — 12.0 V
(SB)
ACC
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
22
Ground Woofer Amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
(W)
ACC
Ignition
24 23
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Sound output.
(GR/V) (W/L)
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
26 25 C
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Sound output.
(GR/V) (W/L)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
(G) (R) speaker LH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition J
(BR) (Y) speaker RH
ON
K
SKIB3609E
L
Ignition
33 34
Sound signal front RH Input switch Sound output.
(W/R) (B/R)
ON
M
SKIB3609E
AV
Ignition
35 36
Sound signal front LH Input switch Sound output. O
(W/R) (B/R)
ON
SKIB3609E P

NOTE:
SWITCH.

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1855GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1856GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1857GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1858GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1859GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1860GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1861GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1862GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1863GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1864GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1865GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1866GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1867GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1868GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1869GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1870GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1871GB
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION WITH DVD ENTERTAIN-

NOTE:

BOSE AMP.
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1873GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1874GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1875GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1876GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1877GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1878GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1879GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1880GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1881GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1882GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1883GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1884GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1885GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1886GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1887GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1888GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1889GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1890GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1891GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1892GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1147ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(B)
ON
Ignition
3
(Y/R)
ON
Ignition
4
(Y/R)
ON
Ignition Headphone mode is ON. 4.5 V
5 Headphone amp. ON sig-
Ground Input switch
(R) nal Headphone mode is OFF. 0V
ON
Ignition
6
(V/Y)
ACC
8 — Shield — — — —
Rear seat remote controller

Ignition
9 Communication signal operation when AUX or
(V) (DISP→DIST) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear displayed.
PKIB5039J

Ignition
Ground Input switch
(LG) (DIST→DISP) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear displayed.
PKIB5039J

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
switch — 0V
11 ON
Ground Ignition signal Input
(G) Ignition C
switch — 3.3 V
OFF
12 — Shield — — — — D
Composite and RGB image Ignition When AUX or DVD image E

13
Ground synchronizing signal for Input switch is displayed on rear display
(G)
rear display ON unit.
F
SKIB0825E
G
Ignition When AUX or DVD image
14
Ground Composite image signal Input switch is displayed on rear display
(R)
ON unit. H
SKIB2251J
When AUX or DVD image I

0V
is displayed.
J
Ignition
15 Rear seat remote controller
(B) operation when AUX or
ON
DVD image is displayed on
rear display.
K
PKIB4948J
16 — Shield — — — —
L
M
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
AV
SKIB3598E
Ignition
(W) (HP) signal P
ON
SKIB0825E
Ignition
19
Ground RGB ground — switch — 0V
(W/L)
ON

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
20 operation when AUX or
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Input switch
(Y/G) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA1090ZZ

Ignition
21 RGB image signal (G: operation when AUX or
Ground Input switch
(Y/L) green) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA0984ZZ

Ignition
22 operation when AUX or
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Input switch
(BR/L) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA0984ZZ
23 — Shield — — — —
24 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
27 25 Headphone sound signal
Input switch Headphone sound output.
(V) (LG) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Input switch Headphone sound output.
(Y) (BR) RH
ON
SKIB3609E

NOTE:

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1873GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1874GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1875GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1876GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1877GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1878GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1879GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1880GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1881GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1882GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1883GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1884GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1885GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1886GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1887GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1888GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1889GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1890GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1891GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1892GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0985ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(G) (L) Output
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(L) (L) Output

8 6 Composite image signal for
Output switch is displayed on front display
(L) (R) AV control unit
ON unit.
SKIB2251J
Ignition
15
(B)
ON
Ignition
16
(B)
ON
Ignition
19 When AUX image is dis-
Ground AUX image signal Input switch
(G) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
21 — Shield (AUX image GND) — — — —

22 — Shield (DVD image GND) — — — —

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
23 When DVD image is dis- C
Ground DVD image signal Input switch
(P) played.
ON
SKIB2251J D
Rear seat remote controller E

Ignition
25 RGB image signal (R: red) operation when AUX or
(R) for rear display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
F
JSNIA0984ZZ
G
Ignition
26 RGB image signal (G: operation when AUX or
(L) green) for rear display unit
ON
DVD image is displayed on H
rear display unit.
JSNIA0984ZZ
I
Ignition
27 RGB ground for rear dis-
Ground — switch — 0V
(W) play unit
ON
J

Ignition
28 RGB image signal (B: blue) operation when AUX or K
(G) for rear display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
L
JSNIA1090ZZ
M
Ignition
(R) signal for rear display unit
ON
AV
SKIB3598E
Ignition
Ground Input switch — P
(W) (HP) signal for rear display
ON
SKIB0825E
31 — Shield — — — —

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When AUX or DVD image
is displayed on rear display 0V
unit.
Ignition
32 RGB area (YS) signal for
Ground Output switch Rear seat remote controller
(B) rear display
ON operation when AUX or
DVD image is displayed on
rear display unit.
PKIB4948J
Composite and RGB image Ignition When AUX or DVD image

33
Ground synchronizing signal for Output switch is displayed on rear display
(G)
rear display ON unit.
SKIB0825E

34 Composite image signal for
Ground Output switch is displayed on rear display
(R) rear display unit
ON unit.
SKIB2251J
35 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
switch — 0V
36 ON
Ground Ignition signal Output
(G) Ignition
switch — 3.3 V
OFF
38 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
Ground Input switch
(V) (DISP→DIST) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
PKIB5039J

Ignition
(LG) (DIST→DISP) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
PKIB5039J
Ignition
51
(B)
ON

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
53
(B)
ON
Ignition C
54
(Y)
OFF
Ignition D
55
(V)
ACC
Ignition
56 E
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
Ignition Headphone mode is ON. 4.5 V
60 Headphone amp. ON sig-
(R)
Ground
nal
Output switch F
ON Headphone mode is OFF. 0V
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION WITH DVD ENTERTAIN- G

NOTE:
H
AV

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
SWITCH.
JCNWM1872GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1873GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1874GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1875GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1876GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1877GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1878GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1879GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1880GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1881GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1882GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1883GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1884GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1885GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1886GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1887GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1888GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1889GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1890GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1891GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1892GB

DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA1147ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V H
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y) I
OFF
Ignition
4
(V) J
ACC
5 — Shield (DVD image GND) — — — —
Ignition
7 When DVD image is dis-
Ground DVD image signal Output switch
(P)
ON
played. L
SKIB2251J
M
Ignition AV
13 11
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound output.
(G) (B)
ON
O
SKIB3609E
P
Ignition
14 12
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound output.
(R) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E
16 — Shield — — — —

DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Output switch Headphone sound output.
(G) (R) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Headphone sound output.
(V) (LG) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
21 22 Sound signal LH
Output switch DVD or AUX sound output.
(B) (G) (DVD and AUX sound)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
23 24 Sound signal RH
Output switch DVD or AUX sound output.
(R) (W) (DVD and AUX sound)
ON
SKIB3609E

— — — —
(L) (L) Output
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
— — — —
(R) (H) Output

NOTE:

DVD PLAYER
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1873GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1874GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1875GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1876GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1877GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1878GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1879GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1880GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1881GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1882GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1883GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1884GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1885GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1886GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1887GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1888GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1889GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1890GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1891GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1892GB

JPNIA0010ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
Ignition
Output switch
(Y/L) (W/L) LH is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch
(BR/L) (Y/G) RH is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
8 Request signal When satellite radio mode
(R/W) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON
SKIA9299J
Ignition
(R/L) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON
SKIA9300J

Terminal Description
Reference value A
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(B) (CONT→SAT) is selected C
ON
SKIA9301J
D
Ignition
12
(V)
OFF
Ignition
E
15
(B)
ON
Ignition F
16
(GR)
ACC
33 — Satellite antenna Input — — — G

TAINMENT SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003702915 H
NOTE:
SWITCH. I
J
AV

JCNWM1855GB

AV
JCNWM1856GB

JCNWM1857GB

AV
JCNWM1858GB

JCNWM1859GB

AV
JCNWM1860GB

JCNWM1861GB

AV
JCNWM1862GB

JCNWM1863GB

AV
JCNWM1864GB

JCNWM1865GB

AV
JCNWM1866GB

JCNWM1867GB

AV
JCNWM1868GB

JCNWM1869GB

AV
JCNWM1870GB

JCNWM1871GB

NOTE:

SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

JCNWM1873GB

AV
JCNWM1874GB

JCNWM1875GB

AV
JCNWM1876GB

JCNWM1877GB

AV
JCNWM1878GB

JCNWM1879GB

AV
JCNWM1880GB

JCNWM1881GB

AV
JCNWM1882GB

JCNWM1883GB

AV
JCNWM1884GB

JCNWM1885GB

AV
JCNWM1886GB

JCNWM1887GB

AV
JCNWM1888GB

JCNWM1889GB

AV
JCNWM1890GB

JCNWM1891GB

AV
JCNWM1892GB

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0618ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 13 When iPod mode is select-
iPod sound signal LH Output switch
(BR) (L) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
iPod sound signal RH Output switch
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
3
(R)
ACC
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
Ignition
5
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
8
(W)
Ground iPod battery charge Output switch Connected to iPod®. 12.0 V
ON

IPOD ADAPTER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
C
Communication signal Ignition The wave pattern is dis-
9
Ground Output switch played just after iPod con-
(G) (iPod adapter→iPod®) ON nection.
JPNIA0462GB D
NOTE:
After the wave pattern display,
the value continues Approx 3.3 V
E
Communication signal Ignition F

10
Ground ® Input switch Connected to iPod®.
(R) (iPod →iPod adapter) ON
G
JPNIA0462GB
Ignition
11
(R)
Ground ACCESSORY-IDENTIFY — switch Connected to iPod®. 0V H
ON
I
Ignition
iPod sound signal RH Input switch
(V) (R) ed.
ON
J
SKIB3609E
15 — Shield — — — — K
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
Ignition L
17 Ground Ground — switch — 0V
ON
19 — Shield — — — — M
Ignition Not connected to iPod®. 4.0 V
21 iPod connection recogni-
Ground Input switch
(L) tion signal
ON Connected to iPod®. 0V
AV
Ignition
22
(BR)
Ground ACCESSORY-DETECT — switch Connected to iPod®. 0V
ON
O
Ignition
24 23
iPod sound signal LH Input switch
When iPod mode is select- P
(LG) (R) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

IPOD ADAPTER
NOTE:
SWITCH.
JCNWM1855GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1856GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1857GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1858GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1859GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1860GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1861GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1862GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1863GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1864GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1865GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1866GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1867GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1868GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1869GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1870GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1871GB

NOTE:

IPOD ADAPTER
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1873GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1874GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1875GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1876GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1877GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1878GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1879GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1880GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1881GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1882GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1883GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1884GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1885GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1886GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1887GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1888GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1889GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1890GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1891GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1892GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JPNIA0011ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(V)
OFF
Ignition
2
(GR)
ACC
Ignition
3
(R)
ON
Ignition
4
Ground ground — switch — 0V
(B/W)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
7 8
Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(R/w) (R/L)
ON
PKIB5037J
Ignition
8
Ground Microphone GND — switch — 0V
(R/L)
ON
Ignition During voice guide output

9 10
TEL voice signal Output switch with the switch
(B/R) (W/R)
ON pressed
SKIB3609E

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
14
Ground GND — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition C
20
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition D
24
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B/W)
ON
NOTE:
Maximum voltage may be 12 V E
due to specifications (connected
units).
Ignition F
Ground Input switch
(BR) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH)
ON
SKIA6649J
Ignition H
29
Ground Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(B)
ON
33 — TEL antenna Input — — — I
34 — Shield — — — —
— — — —
(Y) (H) Output J
— — — —
(BR) (L) Output
40 AV communication signal Input/ K
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
— — — —
(GR) (L) Output L

M
NOTE:
SWITCH. AV
O

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1855GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1856GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1857GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1858GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1859GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1860GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1861GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1862GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1863GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1864GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1865GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1866GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1867GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1868GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1869GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1870GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1871GB

NOTE:

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1872GB P

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1873GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1874GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1875GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1876GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1877GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1878GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1879GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1880GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1881GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1882GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1883GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1884GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1885GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1886GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1887GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1888GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1889GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1890GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1891GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1892GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0007ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(B) age is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
7
Ground Rear view camera ground — switch — 0V
(R/W)
ON
Ignition R position. 6.0 V
8
Ground Camera ON signal Output switch
(R/L) Other than R position. 0V
ON
Ignition
ground
ON
Ignition
11 Camera image signal Output switch
ON
SKIB2251J

Ignition 0V
14 Camera-connection recog- trol unit connector.
(L) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector.
— — — —
(BR) (L) Output
— — — —
(Y) (H) Output

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
19 AV communication signal Input/ B
— — — —
(GR) (L) Output
— — — —
(G) (H) Output C
22
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(R) Other than R position. 0V
ON D
E
Turn the steering to the
right.
F
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
Ignition B: Sensor signal 2
23
Ground Sensor signal 1 Input switch G
(G)
ON
H
Turn the steering to the left.
I
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
J
K
right.
L
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
24
Ground Sensor signal 2 Input switch
(SB)
ON
M
AV
SKIB3828E O
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
25 Turn the steering around
(O) the neutral position.
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
NOTE:
units).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(BR) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH).
ON
SKIA6649J
Ignition
30
(GR)
ACC
Ignition
31
(B)
ON
Ignition
32
(V)
OFF

NOTE:
SWITCH.

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1855GB P

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1856GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1857GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1858GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1859GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1860GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1861GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1862GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1863GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1864GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1865GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1866GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1867GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1868GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1869GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1870GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1871GB

NOTE:

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH.
JCNWM1872GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1873GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1874GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1875GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1876GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1877GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1878GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1879GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1880GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1881GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1882GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1883GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1884GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1885GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1886GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1887GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1888GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1889GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1890GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1891GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1892GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
OPERATION
C
• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit.
• All switches cannot be operated.
• AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system D
multifunction switch.
selection screen when the CON-
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
SULT-III is started.
Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated. E
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-103, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT-III is started.
F
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operat-
Replace multifunction switch AV-534, "Exploded View"
ed.
or preset switch AV-535, "Exploded View".
G
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
Basic Inspection
H
• Check that the cellular phone is a corresponding type (Bluetooth™ correspondence) when the hands-free
related malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis.
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a
corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type I
phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or
cellular phone.
J
Simple check for Bluetooth™ communication
• If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, the following pro-
cedure allows the technician to judge which device has a malfunction.
K
1. Turn on the cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near the cellular phone. L
™
4. When operating Bluetooth registration by cellular phone,
*
check if CONSULT-III is displayed on the device name.
M
(If another Bluetooth™ device is located near the cellular phone,
the name of the device will also be displayed.)
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”. AV
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor- O
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table. JPNIA0441GB
On board self-diagnosis of hands-free phone system

P
Always perform the on board self-diagnosis at first after completing the basic inspection when the malfunction
is detected on the hands-free phone system. Narrow down possible causes using the Diagnosis Chart if there
is no malfunction in the on board self-diagnosis.

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (No connec- TEL adapter unit malfunction.
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
tion is displayed on the display Refer to AV-547, "Exploded View".
at the guide.)
• Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
Hands-free phone cannot be Both the reception and the speech cannot
• No malfunction.
established. be performed
TEL adapter unit malfunction.
The operation of the “ ” switch can TEL voice signal circuit malfunction between TEL adapt-
The other party's voice cannot be performed. er unit and AV control unit.
be heard by hands-free phone. Control signal circuit.
The operation of the “ ” switch can-
not be performed. Refer to AV-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
TEL adapter unit.

Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.
by the other party with hands-
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit.
Sound operation function does not work.
RELATED TO CAMERA
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc-
tion between AV control unit and front display unit.
Camera image is not displayed
For front display unit, AUX image is not Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
(displayed in black and nothing
displayed. • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
can be displayed).
between AV control unit and front display unit.
• Camera image signal circuit between camera control
Camera image is not shown. unit and rear view camera.
(Vehicle width and possible — Refer to AV-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
route line is displayed.) • Rear view camera ON signal circuit.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Camera image signal circuit malfunction between cam-
For front display unit, AUX image is nor-
era control unit and AV control unit.
mal.
Camera image is not displayed. • RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
(Only warning message under control unit and front display unit.
area is displayed.) For front display unit, AUX image is not Refer to AV-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
displayed. • Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/
Adjustment mode, Reverse Sensor is not Reverse signal circuit malfunction (camera control unit).
turned ON at “Connection Confirmation”.
For front display unit, AUX image is also Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image is rolling.
rolling. • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction

A
Camera-connection recognition signal circuit malfunc-
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is indi-
tion between AV control unit and camera control unit.
cated.
Camera image does not switch. Refer to AV-98, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is not B
Reverse signal circuit malfunction (AV control unit).
indicated.
Possible route line is indicated
Steering angle sensor signal circuit malfunction.
abnormally when camera im- — C
age is displayed.
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT)

D
• All RGB images are not shown.
E
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
lection screen when the CONSULT-III Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
is started.
RGB image is not shown.
• All RGB images are not shown. AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc- F
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on system tion.
selection screen when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-103, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
III is started. dure".
G
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between AV con-
Light blue (Cyan) tint. trol unit and front display unit.
H
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between AV
Color of RGB image is not
Purple (Magenta) tint. control unit and front display unit.
proper.
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between AV con- I
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and front display unit.
Front display unit, AUX and DVD image

RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between AV J
RGB screen is rolling. control unit and front display unit.
are normal.
RELATED TO REAR DISPLAY K

L
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
between video distributor and rear display unit.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction M
The menu screen is not dis- For rear display unit, AUX and DVD im-
played. age are normal.
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between vid-
eo distributor and rear display unit. AV
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between video dis-
Light blue (Cyan) tint. tributor and rear display unit. O
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between video
Color of RGB image (menu dis-
Purple (Magenta) tint. distributor and rear display unit.
play screen) is not proper. P
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between video
Screen looks yellowish. distributor and rear display unit.

Front display unit is not displayed.
AUX and DVD image are not
displayed. Composite image signal circuit malfunction between vid-
Front display unit is normal. eo distributor and rear display unit.
Composite synchronizing signal circuit malfunction be-
AUX and DVD image are roll- Front display unit displayed, AUX and
tween video distributor and rear display unit.
ing. DVD image are not rolling.
Rear display unit does not Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
—
open. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
RELATED TO AUDIO
The CD cannot be removed. — Disk eject signal circuit.
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to AV-107, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
No sound from all speakers.
• Amp. ON signal circuit between AV control unit and
BOSE amp.
• Woofer power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to AV-108, "WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure".
There is no Audio sound. • Sound signal woofer circuit between BOSE amp. and
No sound from woofer.
woofer.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit between BOSE amp.
and woofer.
There is no sound from center speaker. Sound signal center speaker circuit.
There is sound from only specific places
Sound signal circuit of malfunctioning system.
(RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear).
Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check antenna base mounting nut for looseness.
NOTE:
“ANTENNA” is not displayed even when Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.)
the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite ra- 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
dio mode. 3. Replace the antenna base.
4. Replace the satellite radio tuner.
Satellite radio is not received. Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check the connection between satellite radio tuner
and antenna connector.
2. Check the connection between satellite radio anten-
“ANTENNA” is displayed when the chan- na and antenna feeder.
nel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode. 3. Check antenna feeder for open circuit.
4. Replace the antenna base.
5. Replace the satellite radio tuner.
The sound of satellite radio is Satellite radio sound signal circuit between AV control unit
Other audio sounds are normal.
not heard. and satellite radio tuner.
It does not change to satellite There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
radio mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Antenna feeder.
RELATED TO iPod®
Connect another iPod® and check if the symptom is reproduced or not. If the symptom is reproduced, diag-
nose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness.
NOTE:

It is unable to check connection between iPod® and iPod harness.
A
• iPod sound signal circuit between AV control unit and
iPod adapter.
B
The iPod® does not produce Other audio sounds are normal.
sound. • iPod sound signal circuit between iPod® and iPod
adapter.
It does not change to iPod There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. C
mode. self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
“iPod is not connected” is dis-
iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod® D
played when it comes to iPod Connected to iPod®.
mode. and iPod adapter.
iPod® cannot charge the bat- — iPod battery charge circuit between iPod® and iPod
tery. adapter. E
The title of music file in the iP-
od® is not indicated. Serial communication circuit between iPod® and iPod
—
adapter. F
Accessing the iPod® is unavail-
able from the vehicle.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH G

Symptoms Probable malfunction location
Steering switch signal GND circuit. H
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Steering switch. Refer to AV-536, "Exploded View".
Steering switch signal A circuit.

I
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ” switches
of steering switch are not operational. Refer to AV-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” switches of steering switch Steering switch signal B circuit.
J
are not operational.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT (WITHOUT DVD PLAYER MODELS)

NOTE: K
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location L
For front display unit, AUX im-
Camera image is not displayed (Also, Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
age is not displayed (Menu dis- M
menu display is not displayed). • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
play is not displayed, too).
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction between AV
Camera image is not displayed (Menu dis- Refer to AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure".
play is normal). • RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
For front display unit, AUX im- control unit and front display unit.
O
age is not displayed (Menu dis- Refer to AV-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
play is normal).
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between AV control
unit and auxiliary input jacks. P
Camera image is normal.
Refer to AV-128, "WITHOUT DVD ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure".

For front display unit, AUX im- Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image is rolling.
age is rolling. • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
AUX sound signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
There is no AUX sound from The sound other than AUX sound is nor-
input jacks and AV control unit at the side where there is
speaker on the right or left side. mal.
no sound.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT (WITH DVD PLAYER MODELS)

NOTE:
Check that there is no AUX equipment main body malfunction before performing a diagnosis.
Front display unit and rear dis-
play unit, AUX image is not dis- DVD image is not displayed.
played.
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
input jacks and video distributor.
DVD image is normal.
Refer to AV-129, "WITH DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYS-
TEM : Diagnosis Procedure".
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-83,
"CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)". When detecting no
malfunction in those components, the following items are
Camera image is normal. a possible cause.
Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
For front display unit, AUX im- video distributor and AV control unit.
play is normal).
a possible cause.
DVD and camera images are not dis- • RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
played (Menu display is normal). control unit and front display unit.
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
front display unit and AV control unit.
For front display unit, AUX im-
DVD image is not displayed (Also, menu Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
age is not displayed (Menu dis-
display is not displayed). • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
play is not displayed, too).
For front display unit, AUX im- Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
DVD image is rolling.
age is rolling. • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
For rear display unit, AUX im- Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
DVD image is not displayed (Menu display
age is not displayed (Menu dis- video distributor and rear display unit.
is normal).
play is normal). Refer to AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc- B
At AUX of rear display, menu
AUX image is normal. tion between video distributor and rear display unit.
display is not displayed.
eo distributor and rear display unit. C
For rear display unit, AUX and Front display unit displayed, AUX and
tween video distributor and rear display unit. D
DVD image are rolling. DVD image are not rolling.
There is no Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
—
AUX sound. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
E
DVD and AUX sound signal circuit malfunction between
DVD sound is not normal, neither. DVD player and AV control unit at the side where there
There is no AUX sound from is no sound.
speaker on the right or left side. AUX sound signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
F
The sound other than AUX sound is nor-
input jacks and DVD player at the side where there is no
mal.
sound.
It does not change to AUX There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. G
mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
RELATED TO DVD MODE

H
Front display unit and rear dis- I
play unit, DVD image is not dis- AUX image is not displayed.
played.
J
Camera image is normal. a possible cause.
Composite image signal circuits malfunction between K
For front display unit, DVD im- video distributor and AV control unit.
play is normal).
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
L
Camera image is not displayed (Only
warning message under area is dis-
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
played).
control unit and front display unit.
M
For front display unit, DVD im- AV
AUX image is not displayed (Menu display Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
age is not displayed (Menu dis-
is not displayed). • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
play is not displayed).
O
For front display, DVD image is Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AUX image is rolling. P
rolling. • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
For rear display, DVD image is Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
AUX image is not displayed (Menu display
not displayed (Menu display is video distributor and rear display unit.
is normal).
normal). Refer to AV-120, "Diagnosis Procedure".

At DVD of rear display unit,
DVD image is normal. tion between video distributor and rear display unit.
menu display is not displayed.
eo distributor and rear display unit.
For rear display unit, DVD and Front display unit displayed, DVD and
tween video distributor and rear display unit.
AUX image are rolling. AUX image are not rolling.
Refer toAV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
There is no Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
—
DVD sound. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
DVD and AUX sound signal circuit malfunction between
There is no DVD sound from
AUX sound is not normal, neither. DVD player and AV control unit at the side where there
speaker on the right or left side.
is no sound.
It does not change to DVD There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-83, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
RELATED TO REMOTE CONTROL AND HEADPHONE

They operate normally.
• Battery of headphones.
• Headphones.
Headphone does not work Change headphones to another set. It does not operate normally.
• Headphone sound signal circuit malfunction between
DVD player and rear display unit.
• Headphone ON signal circuit malfunction between vid-
eo distributor and rear display unit.
They operate normally.
• Battery of remote controller.
• Remote controller body.
It does not operate normally.
Remote control does not work. Change remote controller to another one. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-83,
a possible cause.
Rear display unit.

A
NOTE: B
Vehicle operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The system is in the video mode. Push <DISC> to change the mode. D
The display is turned off. Push <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low. E
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
F
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION G

Related to telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions. H
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolves.
I
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. J
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster K
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will be recognized.
L
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
M
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag AV
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic O
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper- P
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Symptom Cause and Counter measure

Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition,
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma”,
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- G
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
Heavy vibration may activate the sensor(s), deploy the airbag(s), possibly cause serious injury. I
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003356845 J
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. K
cuit. L
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM M
AV
P
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
PKIA0307E

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
PBIC0191E
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0778ZZ
1. AV control unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove AV control unit with a A/C auto amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
D
JPNIA0779ZZ
E
1. Front display unit

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center ventilator assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. H
AV

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REMOVAL
JPNIA0794ZZ
1. Rear display unit 2. Rear display cover
REMOVAL
1. Insert cloth-covered driver into gaps between rear display cover
(1) and headlining, and remove rear display cover.
: Vehicle front
SKIB4354E
2. Disconnect rear display unit connector, remove rear display unit screws and remove the rear display unit.
INSTALLATION

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
A
D
JPNIA0793ZZ
E
1. Video distributor

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove lower console finisher LH and lower console finisher RH. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View". G
2. Disconnect video distributor connector, remove video distributor screws and remove the video distributor.
INSTALLATION
AV

DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0792ZZ
1. DVD player
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect DVD player connector, remove DVD player screws and remove the DVD player.
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA0773ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "FRONT DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View". G
speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA0774ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View".
speaker.
INSTALLATION

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JPNIA0775ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
JPNIA0781ZZ
1. Rear speaker
2. Rear speaker bracket
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher upper. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear speaker screws, lift up the rear speaker and disconnect rear speaker connector. Then
remove the rear speaker.
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA0780ZZ
E
1. Center speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove center speaker screws, lift up the center speaker and disconnect center speaker connector. Then
remove the center speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

WOOFER
WOOFER
JPNIA0782ZZ
: Vehicle front
1. Clamp
2. Woofer
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor finisher center (back). Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove clamp, disconnect woofer connector and remove the woofer.
INSTALLATION

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
D
JPNIA0783ZZ
E
: Vehicle front
1. BOSE amp.
F
REMOVAL G
1. Remove luggage floor finisher. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove BOSE amp. screws, disconnect BOSE amp. connector and remove the BOSE amp.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0789ZZ
1. Multifunction switch
2. Cluster lid D
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove multifunction switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multifunction switch screws, remove multifunction switch from cluster lid D.
INSTALLATION

PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA0790ZZ
H
1. Preset switch 2. Cluster lid C

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". J
2. Remove preset switch screws (A),(B), remove preset switch (1)
from cluster lid C.
K
M
JPNIA0791ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
A
D
JPNIA0788ZZ
E
1. iPod adapter

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front console pocket assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View". G
2. Disconnect iPod adapter connector, remove iPod adapter screws and remove the iPod adapter.
INSTALLATION
AV

IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0787ZZ
1. iPod connector
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View".
2. Press the pawl from the back of center console to remove iPod connector.
INSTALLATION

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA0795ZZ
F
1. Auxiliary input jacks
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003508014 G
REMOVAL
1. Remove console rear finisher. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console.
INSTALLATION
I
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
Refer to INL-115, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0132ZZ
1. Microphone
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-115, "Exploded View".
2. Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
D
JPNIA0796ZZ
E
1. Camera control unit

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher lower (RH). Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove camera control unit screws, disconnect camera control unit connector and remove the camera
control unit.
INSTALLATION H
Adjustment INFOID:0000000003566821
I
ADJUSTMENT
There may be a misalignment of possible route line center position of rear view monitor after removing camera
control unit. Therefore, correct neutral position with the following procedure. J
1. Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends.
2. Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) min. speed at least 100 m (328.1 ft).
K
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REMOVAL
Refer to INT-37, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0797ZZ
1. Rear view camera 2. Finisher
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door finisher inner. Refer to INT-37, "Exploded View".
2. Remove finisher.
3. Remove rear view camera screws, disconnect rear view camera connector and remove rear view camera
from back door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.

REAR VIEW CAMERA
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle, A
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust offset of rear view camera” mode of Confirma- B
tion / Adjustment mode.
G
SKIB3691E
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the H
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7 I
4. Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is
aligned with the guiding line. Press “OK” switch and record the J
adjusted guiding line position to the camera control unit.
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20 K
Left/Right adjustment range : −20 – 20
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data. L
If Confirmation/Adjustment mode does not function in the above procedure, perform one of the
following service to adjust the index again.
• Remove battery for five min. Then reconnect battery. M
• Remove camera control unit connector for five min. Then reconnect camera control unit connec-
tor.
AV

REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0135ZZ
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable.
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
INSTALLATION

ROOF ANTENNA
ROOF ANTENNA
A
JPNIA0786ZZ F
Antenna bade & satellite radio an-

1. Rod antenna 2.
tenna
G
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
H
REMOVAL
25, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" [without sunroof] or INT-29, "SUNROOF : Exploded View" [with I
sunroof].
2. Disconnect AM/FM main connector and satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Remove antenna base & satellite radio nut, and then remove antenna base &satellite radio antenna from J
roof panel.
INSTALLATION
K
Antenna base & satellite ra- : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
dio antenna mounting nut L
CAUTION:
When Antenna base & satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose, be careful
about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof panel may M
become deformed.
AV

JPNIA0784ZZ
1. Satellite radio tuner 2. Bracket LH 3. TEL adapter unit

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor finisher front. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove satellite radio tuner (1) with TEL adapter unit as a sin-
gle unit from the body.
: Vehicle front
3. Remove bracket screws, and them remove satellite tuner.
JPNIA0785ZZ
INSTALLATION

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
A
JPNIA0784ZZ
1. Satellite radio tuner 2. Bracket LH 3. TEL adapter unit G

4. Bracket RH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003356889 H
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor finisher front. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View". I
2. Remove TEL adapter unit (1) with satellite radio tuner as a sin-
gle unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and them remove TEL adapter unit. J
L
JPNIA0805ZZ
INSTALLATION M
AV

JPNIA0798GB

ANTENNA FEEDER (SATELLITE RADIO)
A
AV
P
JPNIA0798GB

ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL)
ANTENNA FEEDER (TEL)
JPNIA0798GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA0732GB M
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-670, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-751, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurring symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-670, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-751, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.

A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-
B
scription INFOID:0000000003356542
Always correct the center position of the rear view monitor's possible route line after disconnecting the battery
negative terminal. C
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-

cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003356543
D

Refer to the following for details. E
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement". F
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description G
INFOID:0000000003356544
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of rear view monitor possible route line is corrected.
H
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000003356545
I
Refer to the following for details.
J
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST- K
MENT
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST- L
MENT : Description INFOID:0000000003356546
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted. M
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST-
MENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003356547
AV
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost positions. O
>> GO TO 2
2.DRIVING P
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> END

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1070GB
NOTE:
SWITCH.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
radio antenna is adopted. A
JSNIA1062GB
D
MULTI AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

E
System name System explanation
NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV-560, "System Description"
F
AUDIO SYSTEM AV-568, "System Description"
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-565, "System Description"
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM AV-572, "System Description" G
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, mainte-
nance and navigation is displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM and
H
combination meter.
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication
transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. I
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM Refer to the following “AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM”.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM Refer to the following “VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM”.
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM Refer to the following “TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM”. J
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L). K
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, combination
meter. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Transmitting/ L
receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting and
receives the response signal.
• AV control unit is connected with front display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required
signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from front display unit. M
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis.
• CONSULT-III self diagnosis: Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)". AV
• On board self diagnosis: Refer to AV-575, "Diagnosis Description".
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. O
• Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits
operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication.
• The AUX image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks to the front display unit. P

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• The AUX sound signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks to the AV control unit. The AV control unit out-
puts the AUX sound signal to the BOSE amp. The BOSE amp. outputs the AUX sound signal to woofer and
each speaker.
JSNIA1091GB
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

• Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by inputting sound in to a microphone.
• Start of sound recognition system can be performed by steering switch.
JSNIA1092GB
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM
JSNIA0904GB
Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching the appropriate display.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1096ZZ
M

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. BOSE amp. AV
7. Woofer 8. Rear view camera 9. Camera control unit
Antenna base (antenna amp. and
10. Rear speaker RH 11. 12. Rear door speaker RH
satellite antenna) O
16. GPS antenna 17. Steering angle sensor 18. Steering switch
19. Auxiliary input jacks 20. iPod connector 21. iPod adapter P
22. Preset switch 23. AV control unit 24. Multifunction switch
Luggage floor finisher is removed Luggage side finisher lower RH is re- Combination meter is removed condi-
A. B. C.
condition moved condition tion
D. Spiral cable part E. Console finisher is removed condition

MULTI AV SYSTEM

• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be
stored.
• The AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navi-
gation, satellite radio, and vehicle information functions.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
trol.
parking brake).
• Update of map data is performed with the CONSULT-III and the applicable ca-
ble.
• It includes the TEL adapter and Bluetooth™ function.
unit.
chronizing). Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jack. Cam-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
era image signal is input from camera control unit.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display
directly.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
iliary input operations are integrated.
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone, audio response and navigation, etc.
STEERING SWITCH are possible.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
output to front display unit.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. B
C
erates.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR D
control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition.
MICROPHONE • Mic signal is transmitted to AV control unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the AV control unit. E
AUX image signal of auxiliary input is transmitted to front display, and sound sig-
nal is transmitted to AV control unit.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit. F
is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP. G
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA H
• Receives the satellite radio wave and outputs it to the AV control unit.
trol unit. I
J
AV

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
JSNIA0908GB
DESCRIPTION
• The AV control unit controls navigation function while GPS tuner has built-in map data, GYRO (angle speed
sensor), on the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
• The AV control unit inputs operation signal with communication signal, through display (touch panel) and
multifunction switch and steering switch.
• Guide sound is output to front speaker through BOSE amp. from AV control unit when operating navigation
system.
• A vehicle position is calculated with the GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, signal from GPS satel-
lite and map data stored on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), and transmits the map image signal (RGB image, RGB
area, RGB image synchronizing) to the front display unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the current vehicle
position according to the following three types of signals.
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed
sensor
• Vehicle turning angle determined by the gyroscope (angular speed
sensor)
• The travel direction of the vehicle determined by the GPS antenna
(GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data, which is stored in the HDD
(Hard Disk Drive) (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with
JSNIA0177GB
a current location mark. More accurate data is used by comparing
position detection results from GPS to the map-matching.
The current position is calculated by detecting the travel distance
from the previous calculation point, and its direction change.
• Travel distance
The travel distance is generated from the vehicle speed sensor
input signal. The automatic distance correction function is adopted
for preventing a miss-detection of the travel distance because of
tire wear etc.
• Travel direction
The gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and GPS antenna (GPS
information) generate the change of the travel direction. Both have
advantages and disadvantages as per the following descriptions.
SEL684V

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
Type Advantage Disadvantage
Gyroscope (angular velocity Errors are accumulated when driving a long dis-
The turning angle is precisely detected.
sensor) tance without stopping.
B
GPS antenna (GPS informa- The travel direction (North/South/East/West) The travel direction is not precisely detected when
tion) is detected. driving slowly.
Input signals are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with C
more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new D
location is judged to be more accurate. This is done by comparing
the current vehicle position (calculated by the normal position detec-
tion method) from the map data stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
E
SEL685V G
There is a possibility that the vehicle position may not be corrected the when vehicle is driven over a certain
distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. Manually correct the current location mark on the H
screen.
• Map-matching detects, prepares, and prioritizes several alternative
routes in addition to the road detected as currently being driven on.
Therefore, due to errors in the distance and/or direction, an incor- I
rect road may be prioritized, and the current location mark may be
repositioned to the incorrect road.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. J
Therefore, the current location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road, etc.
K
SEL686V
L
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which
the vehicle is driving is new, etc. and not recorded in the map data.
In addition map-matching does not function correctly when the
road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are M
different due to repair, etc.
Therefore, the map-matching function detects other roads as a
currently driving road if the road is not in the map, and displays the AV
current location mark on it. Later, the current location mark may be
repositioned to the road if the correct road is detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
O
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data is
JSNIA0180GB
limited. Therefore, correction by map-matching is not possible
when there is an excessive gap between the real-time vehicle position and the position on the map.
P
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while the vehicle is
stopped.
Accuracy of GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
JSNIA1096ZZ
M

A. B. C.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

• It is the master unit that controls each operation of the Navigation system.
• The HDD (Hard Disk Drive) is built in, and the map data is stored in HDD.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• The RGB signal (map information) is output to the front display unit.
• The voice guidance signal is output to the BOSE amp.
• Map image signal is input from AV control unit, and it is indicated on the display.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Each operation of navigation can be performed by the touch panel function.
Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to front LH/RH
BOSE AMP.
speakers.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. is output.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Each operation of navigation can be performed.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • The multifunction switch is connected to the preset switch by wiring harness,
• Each operation of navigation, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit.
• Power (Mic VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and is output to AV control unit.

A
JSNIA1093GB
G
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE H

• Power is supplied to rear view camera from camera control unit and outputs camera image signal to camera
control unit when selector lever is set to the “R” position and the reverse signal on camera control unit is
input. I
• Camera control unit synthesizes guide lines and possible route lines with camera image signal from rear
view camera, and transmits camera image signal to the front display unit. In this case, since the reverse sig-
nal is also input to AV control unit, the AV control unit recognizes that the selector lever is in the “R” position,
and it switches communication signal between AV control unit and front display unit, and image that is dis- J
played on the front display unit by RGB image signal with rear view monitor image. In addition, possible
route lines are controlled by original sensor signal from steering angle sensor.
• The AV control unit determines whether rear view camera is equipped or not, based on the presence of cam- K
era connection recognition signal. It switches to rear view monitor image at the time of reverse signal input
when it is equipped.
• Warning message under the rear view monitor display is described by AV control unit.
L
• AV control unit is connected in communication with camera control unit and front display unit, and it controls
operation of rear view monitor system.
AV

JSNIA1096ZZ

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. BOSE amp.
satellite antenna)
19. Auxiliary input jacks 20. iPod connector 21. iPod adapter
A. B. C.


• Image on display is changed to rear view monitor image with serial communi- B
AV CONTROL UNIT cation between AV control unit and front display unit.
• Warning displayed in rear view monitor image is illustrated.
• Camera image signal is transmitted from camera control unit, and RGB signal C
for warning display is transmitted from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Rear view monitor image is changed with the communication for AV control
unit.
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera, and camera image is in-
D
dicated on the front display unit.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit. E
REAR VIEW CAMERA The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit.
F
control unit.
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1094GB
NOTE:
• The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
radio antenna is adopted.
JSNIA1062GB
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated with multifunction switch,
preset switch, touch panel, steering switch or audio recognition. Operation status of AUDIO is indicated in the
display.
Function
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
Music Box (Hard Disk Drive)
CF (Compact Flash)
iPod connection
AUX mode
Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, steering switch, touch
panel function or voice recognition function.

AUDIO SYSTEM
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness. A
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
• Refer to AV-555, "System Description" for explanation of voice recognition function and touch panel function.
B
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between front display unit and AV control unit.
• The image signal to front display operating condition is performed with RGB image signal, RGB area signal C
and RGB synchronizing signal.
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. D
• AM/FM radio wave is received by rod antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp., and finally it is input to
AV control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the back door window glass and the AV control unit is
received.
• Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit. E
Satellite Radio Mode

• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio wave (satellite radio) is received by antenna base (satellite antenna), and it is input to AV control unit. F
AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to both
woofer and each speaker.
CD Mode G
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit. H
Music Box Mode
• Music CD data is stored on HDD that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played.
• AV control unit outputs music (audio signal) that is stored on HDD to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to I
woofer and each speaker.
CF Mode
• AV control unit has built in CF replay function. J
• Music (audio signal) that is stored in CF outputs to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each
speaker when CF is inserted into AV control unit.
iPod Connection K
® ®
• Connect iPod and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter input iPod sound signal from iPod .
When iPod mode is selected, iPod adapter outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit out-
put sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer and each speaker. L
• Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows:
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication. M
• The iPod® connection status can be recognized if iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition signal.
• The iPod adapter can charge iPod®.
AV
AUX Mode
O

AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1096ZZ

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear speaker LH 6. BOSE amp.
satellite antenna)
19. Auxiliary input jacks 20. iPod connector 21. iPod adapter
A. B. C.

AUDIO SYSTEM

• Receiving function of AM/FM/satellite radio, replaying function of CD, replay- B
ing/saving function of music box (HDD), replaying function of CF and voice rec-
AV CONTROL UNIT
ognition function are integrated.
C
unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching the display D
directly.
BOSE AMP. sound signal to woofer and each speaker. E
• Outputs low frequency sound. F
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
G
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER H
REAR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. I
CENTER SPEAKER
iliary input operations are integrated. J
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air K
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness. L
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone, audio response and navigation, etc.
STEERING SWITCH are possible.
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit. M
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the AV control unit.
AV
is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
• Radio signal received by rod antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control O
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
• Receives the satellite radio wave and outputs it to the AV control unit. P
trol unit.

JSNIA1095GB
• AV control unit includes hands-free phone function.

• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth™ communication with cellular
phone.
• Operation is performed by steering switch, and operating condition is indicated on front display.
• Guide sound that is heard during operation is input from AV control unit to BOSE amp., and is output from
front speaker.
WHEN A CALL IS ORIGINATED
Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (MIC. signal) is input to AV control unit. AV control unit out-
puts to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal. Vocal sound is then heard at the
other party.
WHEN RECEIVING A CALL
Vocal sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party. TEL voice signal is output to front speaker, and
the signal is input to BOSE amp. via AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from cellular
phone.

JSNIA1096ZZ
M

A. B. C.


AV CONTROL UNIT • It outputs the TEL voice signal and voice guidance sound signal to the BOSE
amp.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Inputs RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV
control unit and displays the status of hands free phone system.
Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from AV control unit and outputs
BOSE AMP.
it to front speaker.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Outputs the TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from BOSE amp.
• Adjust the sound when using TEL.
PRESET SWITCH • The operation signal is transmitted to the AV control unit via AV communica-
tion.
• The hands free-phone system can be operated.
STEERING SWITCH
• Uses when operating the hands-free phone.
MICROPHONE • Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to the AV control unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from the AV control unit.

A
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode C
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “ ” switch of the 8-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the D
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. E
NOTE:
The disk eject switch cannot be checked.
F
JSNIA1074GB
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF. G
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit H
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
I
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and J
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit, connections between system compo-
nents as well as connections between AV control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and K
satellite radio antenna. Then it displays the diagnosis results on the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot automati- L
cally).
On Board Diagnosis Item
M
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV AV
Self-Diagnosis
control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satel-
lite radio antenna.

Mode Description
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by gray scale display and touch panel
calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control* Not used.

Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve-
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Navigation Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted.
XM SAT Subscrip-
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
tion Status
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
Confirmation/ place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of MULTI AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Handsfree Phone
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed.
Bluetooth The passkey and the device name can be checked and changed.
Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the
Change Channel
satellite radio system can be set.
SAT Change Application Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the sat-
ID ellite radio system can be set.
Diag Not used.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
NOTE:
*: On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing the “BACK” button.
JSNIA1075GB

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be A
selected.
JSNIA0061GB
D
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts. E
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
F
JSNIA0062GB
H
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.
I
Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line J
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
K
Unit malfunction Note Red Green
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red. L
• The number of units that is displayed on the on board self-diagnosis display
according to equipment.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control M
unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV control unit internal error.
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the
screen switch colors are determined according to the following AV
order of priority: red > gray.
JSNIA0593GB

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0064GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
• Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart

to take
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting
unit power supply and ground circuits. no malfunction in those components,
replace AV control unit.
JSNIA0594GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in unit
display), connection malfunctions with other connec-
tion unit may be displayed.
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
malfunction”

to take A
Malfunction is detected in camera- Camera connection recognition signal

connection recognition signal circuit. circuit. C
D
JSNIA0596GB
F
GPS antenna connection malfunction
GPS antenna.
is detected.
JSNIA0597GB H
Satellite radio antenna connection • Satellite radio antenna feeder.

malfunction is detected. • Antenna base. J
K
JSNIA0598GB
AV

to take

are detected:
Serial communication circuits be-
tween AV control unit and front dis-
tween AV control unit and front display
play unit are malfunctioning.
unit.
• serial communication signal be-
tween AV control unit and front dis-
play unit is malfunctioning.
JSNIA0599GB

are detected:
ground circuits.
camera control unit and the junction
of AV control unit and multifunction
multifunction switch and iPod
switch.
adapter are malfunctioning.
camera control unit and iPod adapt-
AV control unit and iPod adapter is
er.
malfunctioning.
JSNIA0600GB
NOTE:
The number of units that is displayed on the on board self-diagnosis display according to equipment.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0617GB

Display Diagnosis
A
JSNIA0689GB
K
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected.
L
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint
G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
M
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and AV
the signals recognized by the system.
JSNIA0075GB

Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks

ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in the ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R”
ON
position
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than the “R” position
Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0076GB
Climate Control
On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
Refer to HAC-157, "CONSULT-III Function" [with 7 inch display].
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is
adjusted.
JSNIA0077GB
SPEED CALIBRATION

During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis- A
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted
on tires.
B
JSNIA0078GB
D
XM SAT SUBSCRIPTION STATUS
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
E
JSNIA0089GB
H
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned I
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of J
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in the AV control unit, the correct date and time
of occurrence may not be able to be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time the error K
occurred. If the current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error
occurrence cannot be correctly located.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend- L
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle. M
Count up method B AV
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switched is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the status is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III. O
Display type of occur-

Error history display item
rence frequency P
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
Count up method B Other than the above

JSNIA0079GB
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ing to the diagnosis results.
ed.
Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function
(MULTI AV)".
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
Connection Of Gyro
XM SERIAL COMM Error
CAN Controller Memory Error
Bluetooth Module Connection Error Replace the AV control unit.
HDD CONN Error

HDD READ Error
HDD WRITE Error
HDD COMM Error
HDD ACCESS Error
DSP CONN Error
DSP COMM Error
Check AV control unit power supply and
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
Internal Communication Error
power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit.
GPS Communication Error An intermittent error caused by strong radio
interference may be detected unless a
GPS ROM Error
symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) oc-
GPS malfunction is detected.
GPS RAM Error curs.
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
GPS RTC Error tion occurs constantly.

A
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Front display unit power supply and B
Front Display Connection Error
malfunctioning. AV control unit and display unit.
• serial communication signal between AV C
functioning.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- D
GPS Antenna Error GPS antenna.
tected.
Camera Control Unit Connection Error tion recognition circuit between AV control tween AV control unit and camera control
unit and camera control unit. unit. E
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.
XM Antenna Connection Error
tion is detected. • Antenna base.
F
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
• Internal Communication Error power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit. G
detected:
H
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
I
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are J
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Camera control unit power supply and
K
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between mul- ground circuits.
• Rearview Camera Connection Error tifunction switch and camera control unit • AV communication circuits between mul-
is malfunctioning. tifunction switch and camera control unit.
• AV communication signal between AV L
malfunctioning.
detected:
M
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between mul- circuits. AV
• iPod Connection Error tifunction switch and iPod adapter are • AV communication circuits between mul-
control unit and iPod adapter is malfunc- O
tioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction is detected in AV communica-

AV communication circuits between cam-
• Rearview Camera Connection Error tion circuits between camera control unit
era control unit and the junction of AV con- P
and the junction of AV control unit and mul-
• iPod Connection Error* tifunction switch.
trol unit and multifunction switch.

• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Switches Connection Error Malfunction is detected in AV communica- AV communication circuits between AV
• Rearview Camera Connection Error tion circuits between AV control unit and control unit and the junction of camera con-
multifunction switch. trol unit and multifunction switch.
• iPod Connection Error*
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Internal Communication Error
• Switches Connection Error Malfunction is detected in AV communica- Check and repair the short circuit in AV
• Rearview Camera Connection Error tion circuits. communication circuits.
• iPod Connection Error*
NOTE:
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis

• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
increases by 1 if the status is normal at the next ignition switch ON
cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA0080GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA0081GB
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(STRG SW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx (Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(RearCamera–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(XM–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(iPod–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–Audio) — —
C Rx(iPod–Audio) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Tx(Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
• Any units with “—” displayed have no history of vehicle connection.

• “Audio” and “Amp” indicate the same status because “Amp” indicates the status of the amplifier integrated in the AV control unit.
• “STRG SW”, “Amp”“XM” indicate the same status as “Audio”. A
Hands-Free Phone
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment, microphone
and speaker test, and memory erase functions are also available. B
JSNIA0083GB
E
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Connection Confirmation” and “Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera” are available.
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION
The steering angle sensor, reverse signal and vehicle speed sensor F
can be inspected.
JSNIA0084GB
I
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status J

When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection
ON
mode is stopped when it is turned ON)
Steer. Angle Sensor • Ignition switch at ACC
K
OFF
• No steering with ignition switch ON
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal
L
ON Selector lever is in “R” with ignition switch ON.
• Ignition switch at ACC
Reverse Sensor OFF
• Selector lever is in position other than “R” with ignition switch ON.
M
— Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal
ON Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON
Vehicle Speed Sensor OFF

• Ignition switch at ACC AV
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal
Side view Switch — Not used O
ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA

Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear-
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor cam-
era.
JSNIA0085GB
Bluetooth
Confirm / Change Passkey
• The Bluetooth passkey can be confirmed and changed.
• The passkey can be changed by four digits within 0 to 9.
JSNIA0086GB
Confirm / Change Device Name

• The Bluetooth device name be confirmed and changed.
• The device name can be changed by sixteen digits from A to Z
(small characters can be used) and “-” (hyphens).
JSNIA0087GB
SAT
• Change Channel
- Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
the satellite radio system can be set.
JSNIA0092GB

• Change Application ID
- Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the A
satellite radio system can be set.
JSNIA0093GB
D
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been E
removed.)
JSNIA0088GB
H
Initialize Settings
Deletes data stored in HDD.
K
JSNIA0095GB
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003356565 L
CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit. M
Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked. AV
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the MULTI AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed. O
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
P
Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• A current malfunction indicates “crnt”. a past malfunction indicates “past”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
the counter increases by 1 if the status is normal at the next ignition switch on cycle.
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-593, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310]
Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200]
Gyro NO CONN [U1201]
CAN CONT [U1216]
BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217]
HDD CONN [U1218] Replace the AV control unit.
HDD READ [U1219]

XM SERIAL COMM [U1220]
HDD WRITE [U121A]
HDD COMM [U121B]
HDD ACCESS [U121C]
DSP CONN [U121D]
DSP COMM [U121E]
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit.
GPS COMM [U1204] An intermittent error caused by strong radio
interference may be detected unless a
GPS ROM [U1205]
symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) oc-
GPS malfunction is detected.
GPS RAM [U1206] curs.
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
GPS RTC [U1207] tion occurs constantly.
detected:
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
malfunctioning. AV control unit and display unit.
functioning.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de-
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] GPS antenna.
tected.
CAMERA CONT CONN [U1250] tion recognition circuit between AV control tween AV control unit and camera control
unit and camera control unit. unit.
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.
XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258]
tion is detected. • Antenna base.

A
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
• INTERNAL COMM [U121F] power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit. B
detected:
C
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch. D
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are E
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Camera control unit power supply and
F
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between mul- ground circuits.
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] tifunction switch and camera control unit • AV communication circuits between mul-
is malfunctioning. tifunction switch and camera control unit.
• AV communication signal between AV G
malfunctioning.
H
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between mul- circuits. I
• IPod CONN [U1254] tifunction switch and iPod adapter are • AV communication circuits between mul-
control unit and iPod adapter is malfunc- J
tioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] Malfunction is detected in AV communica-

AV communication circuits between cam-
tion circuits between camera control unit
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] era control unit and the junction of AV con- K
and the junction of AV control unit and mul-
• IPod CONN [U1254]* tifunction switch.
trol unit and multifunction switch.

• SWITCH CONN [U1240] Malfunction is detected in AV communica- AV communication circuits between AV L
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] tion circuits between AV control unit and control unit and the junction of camera con-
multifunction switch. trol unit and multifunction switch.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] M
• INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
Malfunction is detected in AV communica- Check and repair the short circuit in AV
tion circuits. communication circuits.
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
• IPod CONN [U1254]* AV
NOTE:
O
DATA MONITOR
All Signals
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit. P
• For each signal, the actual signal can be compared with the status recognized on the system.

Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks

On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in the ACC position
On Selector lever in the “R” position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than the “R” position
Selection From Menu

allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG

< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. D
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-25, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON- F

SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system. G
more.

H
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
I
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-40, "Intermittent Incident".
AV

Initial diagnosis of AV control unit.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON-

SULT-III
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.
1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit.
>> INSPECTION END

A

• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be C
stored.
signals from the AV control unit. D
munication to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. E
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003356573 H
Display contents of I
CONSULT-III
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 Replace AV control unit.
[U1310] circuit.
J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH-ROM Replace AV control unit.
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
GYRO NO CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (gyrocompass dis-
[U1201] connection) is detected.
J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
[U1216] detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
BLUETOOTH MODULE
Internal malfunction of AV control unit (Bluetooth module
U1217 CONN Replace AV control unit.
[U1217]
connection malfunction) is detected. J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD connection
[U1218] malfunction) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
HDD-READ Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD read malfunc-
[U1219] tion) is detected.
J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
XM SERIAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (satellite radio tuner
[U1220] communication error) is detected.

U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
HDD-WRITE Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD write mal-
U121A Replace AV control unit.
[U121A] function) is detected.
J
AV

U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD communica-
U121B Replace AV control unit.
[U121B] tion error) is detected.

U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
HDD-ACCESS Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD access error)
U121C Replace AV control unit.
[U121C] is detected.
J
AV

U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
DSP CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP connection
U121D Replace AV control unit.
[U121D] error) is detected.

U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
CONSULT-III
DSP COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP communica-
U121E Replace AV control unit.
[U121E] tion error) is detected.
J
AV

U121F AV CONTROL UNIT
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
INTERNAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (internal communi- AV control unit power supply and
U121F
[U121F] cation error) is detected. ground circuit.
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check AV control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-619, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
Procedure".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

U1204 GPS
U1204 GPS
A
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS recep- B
tion error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-764,
"Exploded View".
Part name Description C

stored.
• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control D
gation, satellite radio, and vehicle information functions. E
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob-
tain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
F
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and G
parking brake).
ble.
• It includes the TEL adapter and Bluetooth™ function. H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
J
An intermittent error caused by strong
radio interference may be detected
GPS CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction) unless a symptom (GPS reception er-
U1204
[U1204] is detected. ror, etc.) occurs. K
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356603 L
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected? AV
NO >> The intermittent malfunction caused by strong radio interference can be detected.
O

U1205 GPS
U1205 GPS
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS recep-
"Exploded View".

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS ROM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction) unless a symptom (GPS reception er-
U1205
[U1205] is detected. ror, etc.) occurs.

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Is any DTC detected?

U1206 GPS
U1206 GPS
A
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS recep- B
"Exploded View".
Part name Description C

stored.
• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control D
gation, satellite radio, and vehicle information functions. E
F
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and G
parking brake).
ble.
• It includes the TEL adapter and Bluetooth™ function. H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
J
GPS RAM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction) unless a symptom (GPS reception er-
U1206
[U1206] is detected. ror, etc.) occurs. K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356609 L

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
Is any DTC detected? AV
O

U1207 GPS
U1207 GPS
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom (GPS recep-
"Exploded View".

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS RTC Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction) unless a symptom (GPS reception er-
U1207
[U1207] is detected. ror, etc.) occurs.

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Is any DTC detected?

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
unit.
C
chronizing). Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jack. Cam-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
era image signal is input from camera control unit.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. D
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display
directly.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003356614 E
Display contents of F
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items are detected: • Front display unit power supply and
• serial communication circuits between AV control unit ground circuits.
U1243
FRONT DISP CONN
and front display unit are malfunctioning. • Serial communication circuits be-
G
[U1243]
• serial communication signal between AV control unit tween AV control unit and display
and front display unit is malfunctioning. unit.
H
1.CHECK FRONT DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT I

Check front display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-619, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT K
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. L

Continuity M
11 70
M49 M146 Existed
22 71
AV
Front display unit O

Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M49 Not existed P
22
YES >> GO TO 3.

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 11 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 22 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J


U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
A
B
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
C
Display contents of D
CONSULT-III
GPS ANTENNA CONN
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. GPS antenna disconnection.
[U1244] E
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK F
Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE H
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground. I
(+)
Voltage J
AV control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M380 110 Ground 5.0 V K
NO >> Replace AV control unit. L
AV


• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera, and camera image is in-
dicated on the display.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
Camera-connection recognition cir-
CAMERA CONT. CONN Malfunction is detected in camera connection recognition
U1250 cuit between AV control unit and cam-
[U1250] circuit between AV control unit and camera control unit.
era control unit.
1.CHECK CAMERA-CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and camera control unit harness connector.
AV control unit Camera control unit

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
B
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Satellite radio waves are received and transmitted to AV control unit.
C
Display contents of D
CONSULT-III
XM ANTENNA CONN Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is detect- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.
U1258
[U1258] ed. • Satellite radio antenna. E
1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CHECK F
Visually check satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE H
1. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground. I
(+)
Voltage J
AV control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M372 108 Ground 5.0 V K
NO >> Replace AV control unit. L
AV

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta-
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
Display contents of Possible malfunction factor/Action to

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Check AV control unit power supply
U1300 [U1300] Malfunction is detected in AV control unit power supply and ground circuits. When detecting no
U121F • INTERNAL COMM and ground circuits. malfunction in those components, re-
[U121F] place AV control unit.
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
U1300 [U1300]
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
and multifunction switch are malfunctioning. AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and switch.
multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
• camera control unit power supply and ground circuits • Camera control unit power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
U1300 [U1300]
• AV communication circuits between multifunction and • AV communication circuits between
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN
camera control unit are malfunctioning. multifunction switch and camera
CONN [U1252]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and control unit.
camera control unit is malfunctioning.
• iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits are • iPod adapter power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT malfunctioning. ground circuits.
U1300
[U1300] • AV communication circuits between multifunction • AV communication circuits between
U1254
• IPod CONN [U1254] switch and iPod adapter are malfunctioning. multifunction switch unit and iPod
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and adapter.
iPod adapter is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
U1300 [U1300] AV communication circuits between
Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be-
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN camera control unit and the junction of
tween camera control unit and the junction of AV control
CONN [U1252] AV control unit and multifunction
U1254* unit and multifunction switch.
switch.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300
• SWITCH CONN AV communication circuits between AV
U1240 Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be-
[U1240] control unit and the junction of camera
U1252 tween AV control unit and multifunction switch.
• REAR CAMERA LAN control unit and multifunction switch.
U1254* CONN [U1252]
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300 • INTERNAL COMM
U121F [U121F]
U1240 Check and repair the short circuit in AV
• SWITCH CONN Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits.
U1252 communication circuits.
[U1240]
U1254* • REAR CAMERA LAN
CONN [U1252]
NOTE:

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356626
B
1.CHECK FUSE
C
Battery 35
D
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

G
M144 19
Battery power supply 22 OFF Battery voltage H
M145
24
M144 7
ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage I
M145 25
Ignition signal M145 35 ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground. L
21 M
Ground M145 OFF Existed
23
AV
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT O
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356627
1.CHECK FUSE P

Battery 35

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.
M49 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between Display unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.
1
Ground M49 OFF Existed
13
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356628
1.CHECK FUSE

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.

YES >> INSPECTION END A
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
B
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356629
1.CHECK FUSE C
Power source Fuse No. D

Battery 35
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
F
Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
G
B60 Battery voltage
ACC power supply 30 ACC H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse. I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector.
K
Is the inspection result normal? L
BOSE AMP. M
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356630
AV
1.CHECK FUSE
O
Battery 23, 24
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

10
Battery power supply B224 OFF Battery voltage
11
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
7
Ground B224 OFF Existed
12
WOOFER
WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356631
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 25
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
Battery power supply B28 6 OFF Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between woofer amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect woofer amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between woofer amp. harness connector and ground.
iPod ADAPTER

iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003356632
A
1.CHECK FUSE
B
Battery 35
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
E
Check voltage between iPod adapter harness connector and ground.
F
NO >> Check harness between iPod adapter and fuse.
H
AV

UNIT)
UNIT)
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the front display unit.


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 17 Ground
JSNIA1029ZZ


RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
C
E
Continuity
Front display unit

G
Continuity
M49 6 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
K
(+)
M49 6 Ground
AV
JSNIA1030ZZ


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 18 Ground
JSNIA1031ZZ


A
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the front display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed B
with AV control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
Front display unit AV control unit E

Continuity
F
Front display unit G

Continuity
M49 19 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
(+) K
Connector Terminal
L
M
M49 19 Ground —
AV
JPNIA0461GB


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to front dis-
play unit.


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 9 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
When RGB image is displayed. Approx. 5.0 V
M49 9 Ground
When AUX image is displayed.
PKIB4948J


A
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon- B
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images
displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.

E
Continuity
G
Front display unit
Continuity
M49 8 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.

1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
K
(+)
M
M49 8 Ground —
AV
SKIB3603E

O
P

In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon-
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images
displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M49 20 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 20 Ground —
SKIB3598E


A
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to front display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and front display unit harness connec- D
tor.
Auxiliary input jacks Front display unit E

Continuity
7 15
M253 M49 Existed F
8 5
G
Front display unit
Continuity
H
M49 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and front display unit connector. J
K
(+) (−)
L
M49 15 M49 5 When AUX image is displayed.
AV
SKIB2251J
Is the inspection result normal? O

P

The disk eject signal is output to AV control unit when the disk eject switch of preset switch is pressed.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Multifunction switch AV control unit

Continuity
M125 14 M147 85 Existed
Multifunction switch
Continuity
M125 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector terminal 85 and ground.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> Replace preset switch.

A
Supply power from AV control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the AV control B
unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
AV control unit Microphone E

Continuity
26 4
F
M145 27 R20 2 Existed
28 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. G
AV control unit
Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
26
M145 Not existed
28 I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. J
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
K
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M145 26 M145 27 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
1. Connect microphone connector.
P

(+) (−)
M145 28 M145 27 Give a voice
PKIB5037J

NO >> Replace microphone.

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA CON-
TROL UNIT)
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA TO CAMERA
A
CONTROL UNIT)
B
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the front C
display unit.
D
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. E
tor.
F
Continuity
G
H
Camera control unit
Continuity
B60 6 Not existed I
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
1. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector. K
L
(+)
Connector Terminal M
AV
B60 6 Ground
tion.
O
SKIB2251J

NO >> Replace rear view camera.

• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the front
display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

tor.

Continuity
Camera control unit

Continuity
B60 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL
(+)
Voltage
Camera control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B60 8 Ground 6.0 V
tion.
YES >> Replace rear view camera.

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT
A
DISPLAY UNIT)
B
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the front C
display unit.
D
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and front display unit connector. E
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and front display unit harness connec-
tor.
F
Camera control unit Front display unit
Continuity
G
12 12
B60 M49 Existed
11 14
4. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground. H
Camera control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground I
B60 12 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL K
1. Connect camera control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. L
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Signal M
Connector Terminal
AV

B60 12 Ground
tion. O
SKIB2251J
P

• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to
the camera control unit.
• Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to the camera con-
trol unit.
• Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed
signal.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor harness con-
nector.
Camera control unit Steering angle sensor

Continuity
23 3
B60 24 M30 6 Existed
25 8
Camera control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals
23 Ground
B60 24 Not existed
25
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
1. Connect camera control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Reference value
Camera control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals
23
B60 24 Ground 5.0 V
25
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
2. Connect steering angle sensor connector.

4. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground. A
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value B
Connector Terminals
Turn the steering to the right

D
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
E
B: Sensor signal 2
23, 24 Ground
B60 Turn the steering to the left G
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1 H
B: Sensor signal 2
Turn the steering around the

25 Ground J
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3 K
B: Sensor signal 1
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.
AV

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M144 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M144 6 M144 15 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
B
D
JSNIA0112GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F
ENTER switch ON 1983 – 2063

14 MENU DOWN switch G
315 – 327
ON
M303 M303 17 MENU UP switch ON 119 – 123
SOURCE switch ON 0 H
switch ON 315 – 327 I

15
J
AV


1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M144 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M144 16 M144 15 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
B
D
JSNIA0112GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F

315 – 327
ON

15
J
AV


1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT


Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV control unit
Continuity
M144 15 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
2. Check steering switch. Refer toAV-645, "Component Inspection".

A
B
D
JSNIA0112GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F

315 – 327
ON

15
J
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS
AV CONTROL UNIT
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On

VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off
Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On

PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off
Ignition switch Light switch ON On

ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC
Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On

REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0004ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
(P)
ON
Ignition
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output.
(G) (R)
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
4 5 Ignition
(O)*1 (SB)*1 Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output. C
(L)*2 (R)*2 ON
SKIB3609E D
0V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU UP
E
1.0 V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing MENU
6 15 2.0 V
(BR) (L)
Steering switch signal A Input switch DOWN switch. F
ON
Keep pressing ENTER

4.0 V G
switch.
Ignition H
7
(R)
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF I
(R) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
10 — Shield — — — —
J
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output. K
(B) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E L
M
Ignition
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output.
(V) (LG)
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
15 O
Ground Steering switch signal GND — switch — 0V
(L)
ON
0V
switch. P
Keep pressing VOL UP
Ignition 1.0 V
16 15 switch.
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(G) (L) 2.0 V
ON Keep pressing switch.

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
21
(B)
ON
Ignition
22
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
23
(B)
ON
Ignition
24
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
25
(R)
ACC
Ignition
26
27 Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(B)
ON
Ignition
Shield (Microphone
ground)
ON
Ignition
28 Make a sound with your
27 Microphone signal Input switch
(W) voice
ON
PKIB5037J
Ignition
35
(G)
ON
Ignition Parking brake ON. 0V
36
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G) Parking brake OFF. 5.0 V
ON
37
(SB) Other than R position. 0V
ON
NOTE:
units).
Ignition
38 Vehicle speed signal (8- When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(V) pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH).
ON
SKIA6649J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Connected to camera con- B
Ignition 0V
Ground Input switch
(P) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector. C
Ignition
42
Ground Control signal 2 Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON D
Ignition
43
Ground Control signal 3 Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON
E
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
(L)
—
(L) Output
— — — F
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
G
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
52 Input/
— CAN–H — — — H
(L) Output
53 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
I
Ignition
61 play color bar by selecting J
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Output switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
K
L
Ignition
(R) green) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS M
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ
AV
Ignition
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Output switch O
(W) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ
P
64 — Shield — — — —

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
65
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(B)
ON
JPNIA0461GB
66 — Shield — — — —
When RGB image is dis-
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
67
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(W) When rear view camera im-
ON
age is displayed.
PKIB4948J
Ignition
(B) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
72 — Shield — — — —

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
79 95 When iPod mode is select- C
(BR) (L) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
(R) (W) ed.
ON
F
SKIB3609E
81 — Shield — — — —
G
85 Pressing the eject switch. 0V
Ground Eject signal Input —
(W) Except for above. 5.0 V
86 — Shield — — — — H
Ignition
I
87 88 When AUX mode is select-
AUX sound signal LH Input switch
(B) (W) ed.
ON
J
SKIB3609E
Ignition
102 K
Ground SW ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON
L
Ignition
103 88 When AUX mode is select-
AUX sound signal RH Input switch
(R) (W) ed.
ON M
SKIB3609E
105 — FM sub Input — — — AV

106 — AM–FM main Input — — —
Ignition
O
ON
Ignition
Not connected to satellite P
108 Ground Satellite antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
antenna connector.
ON
109 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Not connected to GPS an-
110 Ground GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
tenna connector.
ON
111 — Shield — — — —

AV CONTROL UNIT
*1: Type A
*2: Type B
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003457762
NOTE:
SWITCH.
JCNWM1838GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1839GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1840GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1841GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1842GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1843GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1844GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1845GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1846GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1847GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1848GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1849GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1850GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1851GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1852GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1853GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1854GB
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000003457763
When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, or when HDD is malfunctioning,
AV control unit displays the message and limits the AV control unit function.
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
• When the ambiance temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher
• when HDD is malfunctioning

AV CONTROL UNIT
Display
The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below: A
JPNIA0414GB D
Fail-safe mode Display (display of the fail-safe condition) E

HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature. F
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.
HDD system is not functioning.
When HDD is malfunctioning
Please contact your dealer for assistance. G
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS
Function When Fail-safe Function is activated

H
Operation Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated.

Air conditioner • LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates.
Display I
• Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode.
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible.
Audio
Display No display (“Fail-safe mode” is displayed.) J
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Cannot be operated. K
Navigation Operation Cannot be operated.
Self diagnosis The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition L
CONSULT-III diagnosis Cannot be operated.
Ability Operation Mode

There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature. M
If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be
operated.
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE AV
Fail-safe is released on the following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When the temperature of HDD is low or high.
O
If the ambient temperature becomes out of the fail-safe conditional range, normal mode is restored.
When HDD is malfunctioning.
If the malfunction disappears, normal mode is restored. P
NOTE:
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen continuously, replace AV control unit.
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen temporarily, check the “Error History” of Confirmation/
Adjustment mode. If this is normal, then continue the normal operation, observing the function. (It might be a
temporary malfunction of HDD.)

AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003457764

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-593, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-594, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-595, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Control Unit FLASH-ROM [1200] AV-596, "DTC Logic"
U1201 Gyro NO CONN [1201] AV-597, "DTC Logic"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-598, "DTC Logic"
U1217 BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217] AV-599, "DTC Logic"
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-600, "DTC Logic"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-601, "DTC Logic"
U1220 XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] AV-602, "DTC Logic"
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-603, "DTC Logic"
U121B HDD COMM [U121B] AV-604, "DTC Logic"
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-605, "DTC Logic"
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-606, "DTC Logic"
U121E DSP COMM [U121E] AV-607, "DTC Logic"
U121F INTERNAL COMM [U121F] AV-608, "DTC Logic"
U1204 GPS COMM [U1204] AV-609, "DTC Logic"
U1205 GPS ROM [U1205] AV-610, "DTC Logic"
U1206 GPS RAM [U1206] AV-611, "DTC Logic"
U1207 GPS RTC [U1207] AV-612, "DTC Logic"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-613, "DTC Logic"
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] AV-615, "DTC Logic"
U1250 CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] AV-616, "DTC Logic"
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] AV-617, "DTC Logic"
U121F • INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
U1254 • IPOD CONN [U1254]
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] AV-618, "Description"
U1254* • IPOD CONN [U1254]*
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] AV-618, "Description"
U1254* • IPOD CONN [U1254]*
U121F • INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV-618, "Description"
U1254* • IPOD CONN [U1254]*
NOTE:

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
3
(R)
ACC
4 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
5
Ground AUX image ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(R) green) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ
7 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(B) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When RGB image is dis- B
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
C
9
(W) When rear view camera im-
ON
age is displayed.
D
PKIB4948J
Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display F
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
G
H
Ignition
12 When rear view camera im-
14 Camera image signal Input switch
(W) age is displayed.
ON
I
SKIB2251J
Ignition
13 J
(B)
ON
Ignition
Shield (camera image K
ground
ON
L
Ignition
15 When AUX image is dis-
5 AUX image signal Input switch
(Y) played.
ON M
SKIB2251J
AV
Ignition
17 play color bar by selecting O
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
P

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Input switch
(W) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ
Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(B)
ON
JPNIA0461GB
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
NOTE:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1838GB P

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1839GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1840GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1841GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1842GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1843GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1844GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1845GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1846GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1847GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1848GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1849GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1850GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1851GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1852GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1853GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1854GB

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1223ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(LG) (V) er LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(P) (L) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(Y) (BR) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
ON
Ignition
10
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 8 Sound signal rear speaker C
(GR) (BR) LH
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
(L) (O) speaker RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
16 17
Sound signal woofer Output switch Sound output.
(B/R) (W/R)
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition J
(W) (B) speaker LH
ON
K
SKIB3609E
Ignition
20
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — 12.0 V
(SB) L
ACC
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition M
22
Ground Woofer Amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
(W)
ACC
AV
Ignition
24 23
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Sound output.
(GR/V) (W/L) O
ON
SKIB3609E
P

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
26 25
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Sound output.
(GR/V) (W/L)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(G) (R) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
33 34
Sound signal front RH Input switch Sound output.
(W/R) (B/R)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
35 36
Sound signal front LH Input switch Sound output.
(W/R) (B/R)
ON
SKIB3609E
NOTE:

BOSE AMP.
SWITCH. A
AV
JCNWM1838GB P

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1839GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1840GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1841GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1842GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1843GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1844GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1845GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1846GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1847GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1848GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1849GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1850GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1851GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1852GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1853GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1854GB

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0618ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
iPod sound signal LH Output switch
(BR) (L) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
iPod sound signal RH Output switch
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
3
(R)
ACC
— — — —
(L) (L) Output
Ignition
5
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
8
(W)
Ground iPod battery charge Output switch Connected to iPod®. 12.0 V
ON

IPOD ADAPTER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
C
Communication signal Ignition The wave pattern is dis-
9
Ground Output switch played just after iPod con-
(G) (iPod adapter→iPod®) ON nection.
JPNIA0462GB D
NOTE:
After the wave pattern display,
the value continues Approx 3.3 V
E
Communication signal Ignition F

10
Ground ® Input switch Connected to iPod®.
(R) (iPod →iPod adapter) ON
G
JPNIA0462GB
Ignition
11
(R)
Ground ACCESSORY-IDENTIFY — switch Connected to iPod®. 0V H
ON
I
Ignition
(V) (R) ed.
ON
J
SKIB3609E
15 — Shield — — — — K
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
Ignition L
17 Ground Ground — switch — 0V
ON
19 — Shield — — — — M
Ignition Not connected to iPod®. 4.0 V
21 iPod connection recogni-
Ground Input switch
(L) tion signal
ON Connected to iPod®. 0V
AV
Ignition
22
(BR)
Ground ACCESSORY-DETECT — switch Connected to iPod®. 0V
ON
O
Ignition
24 23
When iPod mode is select- P
(LG) (R) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

IPOD ADAPTER
NOTE:
SWITCH.
JCNWM1838GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1839GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1840GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1841GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1842GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1843GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1844GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1845GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1846GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1847GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1848GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1849GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1850GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1851GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1852GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1853GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1854GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0007ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
H
Ignition
6 when rear view camera im- I
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
ON
SKIB2251J
J
Ignition
7
Ground Rear view camera ground — switch — 0V
(R/W)
ON K
8
Ground Camera ON signal Output switch
(R/L) Other than R position. 0V
ON L
Ignition
ground
ON
M
Ignition AV
11 Camera image signal Output switch
ON
O
SKIB2251J

Ignition 0V
Ground Output switch P
(L) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector.
— — — —
(BR) (L) Output
— — — —
(Y) (H) Output

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(GR) (L) Output
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
22
(R) Other than R position. 0V
ON

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
23
(G)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
24
(SB)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition C
25 Turn the steering around
(O) the neutral position.
ON
SKIB3829E D
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
NOTE: E
units).
Ignition F
Ground Input switch
(BR) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH).
ON
G
SKIA6649J
H
Ignition
30
(GR)
ACC
Ignition I
31
(B)
ON
Ignition J
32
(V)
OFF

K
NOTE:
L
AV

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH.
JCNWM1838GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1839GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1840GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1841GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1842GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1843GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1844GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1845GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1846GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1847GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1848GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1849GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1850GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1851GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1852GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1853GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1854GB

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom C

• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. D
• All switches cannot be operated.
• AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system
selection screen when the CON-
SULT-III is started. E
"CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-619, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis F
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operat-
Replace multifunction switch AV-534, "Exploded View" G
ed.
or preset switch AV-535, "Exploded View".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set- H
ting operation is abnormal. Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
Refer to AV-619, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
nosis results.
cedure".
I
On the setting display select “system AV control unit malfunction.
There is no guide sound sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
confirm that guide sound is ON. View".
J
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
• Check that the cellular phone is a corresponding type (Bluetooth™ correspondence) when the hands-free
related malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis. K
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a
corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type
phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or
cellular phone. L
Simple check for Bluetooth™ communication

If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, the following pro- M
cedure allows the technician to judge which device has a malfunction.
1. Turn on the cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
AV
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near the cellular phone.
4. When operating Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone, O
check if CONSULT-III* is displayed on the device name.
(If another Bluetooth™ device is located near the cellular phone,
the name of the device will also be displayed.) P
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table. JPNIA0441GB


Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (no connec- AV control unit malfunction.
tion is displayed on the display Repeat the registration of cellular phone. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
at the guide.) View".
• Hands-free phone operation can be

made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
established.
performed, however, voice between View".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
Check the “microphone speaker” in In- AV control unit malfunction.
spection & Adjustment Mode if sound is Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
The other party's voice cannot heard. View".
be heard by hands-free phone. Check the “microphone speaker” in In- AV control unit malfunction.
spection & Adjustment Mode if sound is Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
not heard. View".
AV control unit malfunction.
Sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
party with hands-free phone View".
communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Sound operation function does not work.
RELATED TO CAMERA

tion between AV control unit and display unit.
Camera image is not displayed
(displayed in black and nothing AUX image is not displayed.
can be displayed)
between AV control unit and display unit.
• Camera image signal circuit between camera control
Camera image is not shown. unit and rear view camera.
(Vehicle width and possible — Refer to AV-635, "Diagnosis Procedure".
route line is displayed.) • Rear view camera ON signal circuit.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
Camera image signal circuit malfunction between cam-
AUX image is normal. era control unit and front display unit.
Camera image is not displayed. Refer to AV-637, "Diagnosis Procedure".
(Only warning message under RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
area is displayed.) AUX image is not displayed. control unit and front display unit.
Select “Camera Cont.” of confirmation/Ad-
justment mode, Reverse Sensor is not Reverse signal circuit malfunction (camera control unit).
turned ON at “Connection Confirmation”.
tion between AV control unit and display unit.
CAMERA image is rolling. AUX image is also rolling.
between AV control unit and display unit.

A
Camera-connection recognition signal circuit malfunc-
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is indi-
tion between AV control unit and camera control unit.
cated.
Camera image does not switch. Refer to AV-616, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is not B
Reverse signal circuit malfunction (AV control unit).
indicated.
Possible route line is indicated
Steering angle sensor signal circuit malfunction.
abnormally when camera im- — C
age is displayed.
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE

D

E
• All RGB images are not shown.
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
lection screen when the CONSULT-III Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
is started. F
RGB image is not shown.
• All RGB images are not shown. AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on system tion.
selection screen when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-619, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- G
III is started. dure".
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between AV con-
Light blue (Cyan) tint. trol unit and display unit. H
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between AV
Color of RGB image is not
Purple (Magenta) tint. control unit and display unit.
proper. I
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between AV con-
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and display unit.
Refer toAV-626, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between AV
RGB screen is rolling. — control unit and front display unit.
Refer to AV-627, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom L

AV control unit malfunction.
Voice sounds at “Voice Microphone Test” M
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-764, "Exploded
The voice cannot be controlled of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
View".
even if the voice control screen
is displayed. Voice does not sound at “Voice Micro-
Microphone circuit malfunction. AV
phone Test” of Confirmation/Adjustment
mode.
Steering switch “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, Steering switch malfunction.
“MENU DOWN”, “ENTER” operates, but Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-775, "Removal and O
“ ” does not operate. Installation".
The voice cannot be controlled
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
(Voice control screen is not dis- Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
played). UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ”, “ENTER” P
does not operate.
Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction.
All steering switches do not work.
RELATED TO AUDIO


Disk eject signal circuit malfunction between AV control
The CD cannot be removed. — unit and preset switch.
• Amp. ON signal circuit.
No sound from all speakers. • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to AV-621, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Woofer amp. power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to AV-622, "WOOFER : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Sound signal woofer circuit between BOSE amp. and
woofer.
There is no sound from the woofer.
Audio sound is not heard. • Sound signal woofer circuit between BOSE amp. and
woofer.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit between BOSE amp.
and woofer.
There is no sound from the center speak-
Sound signal center speaker circuit.
er.
There is sound only from specific places
Sound signal circuit of suspect system.
(RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear).
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check antenna base mounting nut for looseness.
NOTE:
Satellite radio is not received. Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
There is no malfunction in the CON-
2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
SULT-III self-diagnosis result.
3. Replace the antenna base.
4. Replace the AV control unit.
• Antenna feeder.
RELATED TO iPod®
Connect another iPod® and check if the symptom is reproduced or not. If the symptom is reproduced, diag-
nose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness.
NOTE:
It is unable to read a connection between iPod® and iPod harness.
• iPod sound signal circuit between AV control unit and
There is no sound from the iP- iPod adapter.
Other audio sounds are normal.
od®. • iPod sound signal circuit between iPod® and iPod
adapter.
It does not change to iPod There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
mode. self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-589, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
“iPod is not connected” is dis-
iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod®
played when it comes to iPod Connected to iPod®.
mode. and iPod adapter.
iPod® cannot charge the bat- — iPod battery charge circuit between iPod® and iPod
tery. adapter.
The title of music file in the iP-
od® is not indicated.
— Communication circuit between iPod® and iPod adapter.
Accessing the iPod® is unavail-
able from the vehicle.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH
A
Symptoms Probable malfunction location B
Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction.
Steering switch malfunction. C
Only specified switch (1) cannot be operated.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
DOWN”,“ ”, “ENTER”switches do not work. Refer to AV-640, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Steering switch's “ ”, “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
switches do not work. Refer to AV-642, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
F
No vocal sound is heard when Vocal sound is heard when other modes AUX sound signal circuit (auxiliary input jacks to AV con-
AUX mode is selected. are selected. trol unit).
G
Image is not displayed when AUX image signal circuit malfunction.

Camera image is displayed.
AUX mode is selected. Refer to AV-631, "Diagnosis Procedure".
H
AV

NOTE:
• For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
• Vehicle operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS

The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The systems in the video mode. Press <DISC-AUX> to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Press <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or
The volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press <MAP>.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
information in the Address Book.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION
Related to Basic Operation

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet.
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder.
The volume if your voice is too loud. Speak softer.
Your pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.
Press and release “ ” switch on the steering

The system does not You are speaking before the voice recognition is ready switch, and speak a command after the tone
recognize your com- sounds.
mand.
or Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
The system recognizes after you press and release “ ” switch on the
released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
your command incor- steering switch.
rectly
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen.
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed
is automatically lowered and voice commands
The fan of the air conditioner is too loud. can be recognized more easily.
Lower the fan speed as necessary or set the air
conditioner to “Auto”.
Related to Item Choice

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem
is resolved. A
Symptom/ error message Solution

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. B
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level.
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost C
OGNIZED” or the system fails to on.
interpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
D
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with
these in place.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be con-
The system consistently selects firmed by giving the “Addressbook” Directory or Phone Directory command.
E
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Related to Telephone F
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is G
resolved.
Symptom Solution
H
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev- I
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly.
J
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
K
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
L
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
M
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. AV
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE: O
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact P
Disc Standard and may not play.

Symptom Cause and Counter measure

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is
gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addi-
tion, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be
in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time be- If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some
fore the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma”,
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

This is because the quantity of the displayed
information is reduced so that the screen does
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction.
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of
a processing procedure.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
for a while to automatically correct the posi-
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
tion and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the ve-
the next version of the map data.
on another road nearby. hicle icon on the nearest road available.

A
The screen does not switch to the Set the screen to the night screen mode us-
The daytime screen was set the last time the
night screen even after turning on ing <Day/Night> when you turn on the head-
headlights were turned on.
the headlights. lights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis- B
Press <MAP>.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press <MAP>.
played. C
Drive the vehicle for a while (at approximate-
When using tire chains or replacing the tires, ly 19 MPH for about 30 minutes) to automat-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor ically correct the vehicle icon position. D
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect. If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
Updated road information will be included in E
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
the next version of the map data.
in the same area).
RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE F

Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included If you want to go to that waypoint G
the auto reroute calculation. in the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.
H
Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads I
(roads displayed in gray).
The auto reroute calculation
(or detour calculation) sug- Route calculations took priority conditions into consider- J
gests the same route as the ation, but the same route was calculated.
one previously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be
set on the route. If you want to go to K
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones
A waypoint cannot be added. 6 or more waypoints, perform route
that you have already passed.
calculations multiple times as neces-
sary. L
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated. dinary road, and recalculate the
route.
M
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis- Divide your trip by selecting one or
played. two intermediate destinations, and
The starting point and destination are too far away. AV
perform route calculations multiple
times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. off. O
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you
passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting
have already passed is delet- This is not a malfunction.
point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de- P
ed.
pending on the area.)
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
point or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route Reset the destination to a main or or-
calculation does not take into consideration some areas dinary road, and recalculate the
such as narrow streets (gray roads.) route.

The landmark information
Updated information will be included
does not correspond to the ac- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
tual information.
The suggested route does not
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destinations.
form route calculation.
tion.
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE

Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections
marked with? In some cases, voice guidance is not This is not a malfunction.
available even when the vehicle should make a turn.
Voice guidance is not available Go back to the suggested route or request

The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
Voice guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
Route guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi- Follow all traffic rules and regulations.
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
tion.
RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION

The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is
able available
The traffic information
is not displayed You have not subscribed to XM NavTraffic or, your sub-
Check your subscription status of XM NavTraffic.
scription to XM NavTraffic has expired.
The map scale is set at a level where the display of Check that the map scale is set at a level in which
icons is impossible. the display of icons is possible.
With the automatic de- The automatic detour search is not intended for
tour route search ON, There is no faster route compared to the current route, avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fastest
no detour route is set to based on the road network and traffic information. route taking into consideration such things as
avoid congested areas. traffic jams.
The route does not Observe the actual road condition and follow the
avoid road section with The navigation system is designed not to avoid this instructions on road for detour when necessary.
traffic information stat- event because the actual period of closure may differ If the road closure is for certain, use detour func-
ing it is closed due to from the declared roadwork period. tion and set the detour distance to avoid the
road construction. closed road section.
Traffic information dis-
Observe the actual road conditions and regula-
played differs from in-
Other media may use different information sources. tions. Always observe safe driving practices and
formation from other
follow all traffic regulations.
media (e.g. radio).

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
F
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- G
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
Heavy vibration may activate the sensor(s), deploy the airbag(s), possibly cause serious injury. I
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003356691 J
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. K
cuit. L
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM M
AV
P
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
PKIA0307E

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
PBIC0191E
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0799ZZ
1. AV control unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
2. Remove AV control unit with a A/C auto amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
D
JPNIA0779ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center ventilator assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA0773ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "FRONT DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View".
speaker.
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA0774ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Exploded View". G
speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
JPNIA0775ZZ
1. Front squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION

REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA0781ZZ
E
1. Rear speaker
2. Rear speaker bracket
F
REMOVAL
G
1. Remove luggage side finisher upper. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear speaker screws, lift up the rear speaker and disconnect rear speaker connector. Then
remove the rear speaker. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
JPNIA0780ZZ
1. Center speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove center speaker screws, lift up the center speaker and disconnect center speaker connector. Then
remove the center speaker.
INSTALLATION

WOOFER
WOOFER
A
D
JPNIA0782ZZ
E
: Vehicle front
1. Clamp
2. Woofer F
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor finisher center (back). Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove clamp, disconnect woofer connector and remove the woofer. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
JPNIA0783ZZ
: Vehicle front
1. BOSE amp.
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor finisher. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove BOSE amp. screws, disconnect BOSE amp. connector and remove the BOSE amp.
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA0800ZZ
F
1. Multifunction switch
2. Cluster lid D
G
REMOVAL H
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove multifunction switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multifunction switch screws, remove multifunction switch from cluster lid D. I
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
AV

PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0801ZZ
1. Preset switch 2. Cluster lid C
REMOVAL
2. Remove preset switch screws (A) (B), remove preset switch (1)
from cluster lid C.
1. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw
JPNIA0802ZZ
INSTALLATION

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
Refer to ST-15, "Exploded View". B

REMOVAL C
INSTALLATION
D
AV

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
JPNIA0788ZZ
1. iPod adapter
REMOVAL
1. Remove front console pocket assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect iPod adapter connector, remove iPod adapter screws and remove the iPod adapter.
INSTALLATION

IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA0787ZZ
F
1. iPod connector
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View". H
2. Press the pawl from the back of center console to remove iPod connector.
INSTALLATION
I
AV

REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA0795ZZ
1. Auxiliary input jacks
REMOVAL
1. Remove console rear finisher. Refer to IP-19, "Exploded View".
2. Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console.
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
Refer to INL-115, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA0132ZZ
F
1. Microphone
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-115, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
I
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
JPNIA0803GB

GPS ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove combination meter. Refer to MWI-145, "Exploded View".
B
2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector from AV control unit.
3. Remove GPS antenna (1) from instrument panel.
C
JPNIA0804ZZ
INSTALLATION F
AV

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JPNIA0796ZZ
1. Camera control unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher lower (RH). Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Remove camera control unit screws, disconnect camera control unit connector and remove the camera
control unit.
INSTALLATION
ADJUSTMENT
There may be a misalignment of possible route line center position of rear view monitor after removing camera
control unit. Therefore, correct neutral position with the following procedure.
1. Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends.
2. Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) min. speed at least 100 m (328.1 ft).

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
Refer to INT-37, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA0797ZZ
H
1. Rear view camera 2. Finisher

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door finisher inner. Refer to INT-37, "Exploded View". J
2. Remove finisher.
3. Remove rear view camera screws, disconnect rear view camera connector and remove rear view camera
from back door assembly. K
INSTALLATION
L
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
M
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle,
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust offset of rear view camera” mode of Confirma-
tion / Adjustment mode.
SKIB3691E
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7
4. Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is
aligned with the guiding line. Press “OK” switch and record the
adjusted guiding line position to the camera control unit.
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20
Left/Right adjustment range : −20 – 20
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.
If Confirmation/Adjustment mode does not function in the above procedure, perform one of the
following service to adjust the index again.
• Remove battery for five min. Then reconnect battery.
• Remove camera control unit connector for five min. Then reconnect camera control unit connec-
tor.

A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA0135ZZ
F
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
G
REMOVAL H
1. Remove spiral cable.
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV

ROOF ANTENNA
ROOF ANTENNA
JPNIA0786ZZ
Antenna bade & satellite radio an-

1. Rod antenna 2.
tenna
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
REMOVAL
25, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" [without sunroof] or INT-29, "SUNROOF : Exploded View" [with
sunroof].
2. Disconnect AM/FM main connector and satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Remove antenna base & satellite radio nut, and then remove antenna base &satellite radio antenna from
roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Antenna base & satellite ra- : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
dio antenna mounting nut
CAUTION:
When Antenna base & satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose, be careful
about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof panel may
become deformed.

A
AV
P
JPNIA0803GB

JPNIA0803GB

ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS)
ANTENNA FEEDER (GPS)
A
AV
P
JPNIA0803GB

Av PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Av PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......18 PREPARATION ........................................... 36

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT....23 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 39 P

Revision: 2008 October AV-1 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-2 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-3 2009 Murano

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR- DVD PLAYER ................................................... 325

Revision: 2008 October AV-4 2009 Murano

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 517 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 533 L

Revision: 2008 October AV-5 2009 Murano

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 553 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ...................... 593

Revision: 2008 October AV-6 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-7 2009 Murano

VP SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 672

Revision: 2008 October AV-8 2009 Murano

ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 764 iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 777

Revision: 2008 October AV-9 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-10 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-11 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-12 2009 Murano

Component Description INFOID:0000000003415159

Part name Description

Revision: 2008 October AV-13 2009 Murano

Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items.

4. Diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

Revision: 2008 October AV-14 2009 Murano

6. Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

Revision: 2008 October AV-15 2009 Murano

Key check item (steering switch)

4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.

Revision: 2008 October AV-16 2009 Murano

NO HISTORY BTHF — — Not used. D

Revision: 2008 October AV-17 2009 Murano

Power source Fuse No.

Revision: 2008 October AV-18 2009 Murano

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C

Revision: 2008 October AV-19 2009 Murano

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector ter-

Revision: 2008 October AV-20 2009 Murano

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C

Revision: 2008 October AV-21 2009 Murano

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector ter-

Revision: 2008 October AV-22 2009 Murano

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C

Audio unit Spiral cable

Revision: 2008 October AV-23 2009 Murano

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector ter-

Revision: 2008 October AV-24 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-25 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-26 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-27 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-28 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-29 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-30 2009 Murano

Revision: 2008 October AV-31 2009 Murano

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Revision: 2008 October AV-32 2009 Murano

Occurrence condition Possible cause